JP2016096938A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a performance effect from being reduced.SOLUTION: The game machine is capable of executing variable display and comprises: a first display capable of executing specific performance during the execution of the variable display; and a second display capable of displaying a readable two-dimensional code during the execution of the variable display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that displays a two-dimensional code that can be read by a terminal device during a demonstration effect on an image display device or a sub-image device is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
Further, a gaming machine that displays a two-dimensional code for notifying prefetch information on an image display device is known (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP, 2014-076147, A JP 2012-157612 A

However, when a two-dimensional code is output to a display device that displays an image based on the specific effect in the specific effect executed during the game, the effect of the specific effect may be reduced.
The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a reduction in effect.

(1) The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 or the like) has variable display (for example, production control shown in FIG. 28). The game machine capable of executing the processing of step S172 executed by the CPU 120 for specific purposes, and executing a specific effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 28, during execution of variable display). The first display device (for example, the main processing shown in FIG. 1, for example, which can display the specific effect by the control of the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 2) can be executed. Image display device 5) and a two-dimensional code that can be read during execution of variable display (for example, a two-dimensional code shown in FIG. The second display unit capable of displaying etc.) (e.g., shown in FIG. 1, and a sub image display device 50, etc.).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

(2) Further, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1) is in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit state determined by the gaming control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 15). The first display device capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the process of step S761 controlled by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 31) during the advantageous state. (For example, the main image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1) and a two-dimensional code that can be read during the advantageous state (for example, two types shown in FIG. And a second display device (for example, the sub image display device 50 shown in FIG. 1).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

(3) The second display device is provided so as to be operable (for example, the operation of lowering and raising the sub-image display device 50 shown in FIG. 41) and does not display a two-dimensional code during the operation. May be.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to easily read the two-dimensional code and prevent a reduction in the rendering effect.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the second display device is information relating to the game (for example, information such as notice A, reach A, jackpot A shown in FIG. 33). May be displayed (for example, displayable on the display screen of the mobile terminal shown in FIG. 33).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the production effect.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the second display device has any timing (for example, a period from t111 to t112 in which the two-dimensional code is displayed on the sub-image display device 50 shown in FIG. 34 (b). Information regarding the game can be notified during execution of the variable display (for example, at any timing in FIG. 34), for example, the timing for ending the display of information regarding the game shown in FIG. It is also possible to display a two-dimensional code.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the second display device can display a two-dimensional code capable of reporting information related to a game, and reads the two-dimensional code. In order to prevent the information related to the game from being executed prior to the progress of the game (for example, the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen shown in FIG. 34 is executed on the main image display device 5. A two-dimensional code may be displayed (so that it is not displayed prior to the production).

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a reduction in effect.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game state setting process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during a round. It is a figure which shows a response | compatibility with the display screen of a main image display apparatus, the display screen of a sub image display apparatus, and the display screen of a portable terminal in execution of variable display. It is a timing chart which shows a response | compatibility with the production | presentation aspect of variable display by the reading timing of the two-dimensional code displayed during execution of variable display, and the display of a portable terminal. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the some production | generation aspect which a main image display apparatus performs during execution of variable display, and the information regarding the game displayed on a portable terminal. It is a timing chart when a two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the change of variable display. It is a timing chart which shows ending a display of a portable terminal within change of variable display, when a two-dimensional code is displayed twice during change of variable display. It is a timing chart when a promotion effect is performed during a fanfare effect when a two-dimensional code is displayed in a fanfare effect after a big hit. It is a timing chart when a promotion effect is performed during round 1 when a two-dimensional code is displayed in a fanfare effect after a big hit. It is a timing chart when a promotion effect is performed during round 4 when a two-dimensional code is displayed in a fanfare effect after a big hit. It is a figure which shows the raising / lowering of a sub image display apparatus, and the display timing of a two-dimensional code. It is a figure which shows the tilt operation (forward tilt) of a sub image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the raising / lowering (superimposition position) and tilt operation | movement (forward inclination) of a sub image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows raising / lowering (superimposition position) and tilt operation | movement (backward tilt) of a sub image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows raising / lowering (lower main screen) and tilting operation (backward tilt) of the sub image display device.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example.
The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the “winnings”, a winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as a “starting winning”, and in particular, a winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as a first starting prize. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the decorative symbol variable executed in the main image display device 5 are variable. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as display (described later) is established.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B and a decorative symbol executed in the main image display device 5 are used. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, any one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a grand prize opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”.
A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-type games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  A main image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The main image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. Here, various effects performed by the main image display device 5 are referred to as specific effects.

In addition, a sub image display device 50 is provided above the main image display device 5. Similar to the main image display device 5, the sub image display device 50 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.
The sub image display device 50 can be provided to be operable. For example, the sub image display device 50 may perform an operation of moving downward from the origin with the position shown in FIG. 2 as the origin. In the present embodiment, the sub image display device 50 moves downward from the origin and performs a lowering operation with the position covering the display screen of the main image display device 5 as the lower end. That is, when the sub image display device 50 is lowered to the lower end, the display screen of the main image display device 5 is covered with the sub image display device 50.
Further, the sub-image display device 50 may perform a tilt operation that tilts the display screen forward. The tilting operation is performed by tilting the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 provided parallel to the game board 2 forward by a predetermined angle. The tilting operation may be performed when the sub image display device 50 is at the origin position or when it is at the lower end position. For example, when the sub image display device 50 is disposed above the player's eye level, the player looks up at the display screen of the sub image display device 50 from below. If the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 is tilted so as to face the player's direction by the tilt operation, the player can easily view the display of the sub-image display device 50.
The sub image display device 50 may have a lamp such as an LED (not shown). For example, an effect mode in which an image is displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50 and an effect mode in which the lighting state of the LED is changed may be performed.

  In the display area of the main image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, an effect is shown in which decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be individually identified, are exemplified as one of the specific effects. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The main image display device 5 has a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the figure game (special game using the second special figure), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as illustrated in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L, 5 </ b> C, and 5 </ b> R are arranged in the display area of the main image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area of the main image display device 5 (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R), the variation of the ornamental symbol starts in conjunction with (corresponds to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the confirmed decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time) It is also possible to keep the fluctuation time within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It may include something that stops and displays without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  Further, in the display area of the main image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added to the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the main image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information, and the first start winning storage display area If there is another first hold display in 5HL, the new first hold display is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). A hold display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (center side of the display area of the main image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information. If there is another second hold display in 5HR, the new second hold display will be displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). A hold display may be added.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the main image display device 5, in addition to the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the 2 The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested when the first start condition is satisfied, or the first special figure hold information digested when the second start condition is satisfied) 2 Active display area for displaying a special image representing information including active display (also referred to as digestion display, current display, etc.) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special figure hold information AHA (digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, acti Display area, this display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the main image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display or an active display, or an active display such as a character or an image displayed around the active display frame Information corresponding to the display is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the main image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the main image display device 5, and the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3 is installed. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the light emitting member 9U and the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

The main image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Also good.
The specific effect described in the present embodiment may be executed by the main image display device 5 and may be executed by other effect devices such as the speaker 8 and the lamp 9.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state). Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state in a short time a plurality of times per round.

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal open round. A round in which the predetermined time (opening period) for which the big prize opening is in an open state is relatively short (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also called a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening period is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a jackpot gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In the normal open round, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed since the opening of the grand prize opening door, if the predetermined number of prizes for the big prize opening occurs, Change to closed state. On the other hand, in the short-term open round, it is difficult to reach a predetermined number of winnings at the big winning opening. Therefore, in the short-term opening round, the round does not end before the predetermined opening time elapses, and the predetermined opening period is substantially secured for the time required for one round in the short-term opening round to end. become.

  In addition, as described above, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed after the grand prize opening door has been opened, if the predetermined number of prizes are received in the grand prize opening, Although the state changes to the closed state, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any of the special games in the figure game, the decorative symbol variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design (also referred to as “reach fluctuation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative design stopped in the display area of the main image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. ) Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the main image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design. May be executed. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the main image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the number of times (X + 2) obtained by adding together. The number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which the revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 5) is shown, but the revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.
In the present embodiment, even when a plurality of re-variable displays are performed, it is assumed that the variable display is being executed during the pseudo-continuation.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing). In the notice effect, a plurality of notice effects having different effect operations (effect modes) such as background image display, message window display, hold display, sound output, and light emission are prepared in advance, and one notice effect is selectively provided. It may be executed.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a second hold display of the target, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information of the target is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , The same), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and a character or the like is put on hold in the display area of the main image display device 5. An effect (direct action effect) that acts directly or indirectly, or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and the character in the display area of the main image display device 5 Production which are directly or indirectly acting motor or the like to hold display (pending action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it becomes “8R (round) probability variation big hit” which is one mode of “big hit”. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, it is 8R probability variation big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, or without being in a reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variable big hit. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state that is executed 16 times (rounds). ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds), and after that, the probability change control is performed together with the time reduction control.

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control is performed when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit has been reached, and the probability variation control for a predetermined number of STs (for example, 70 times) is completed after the end. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability changes) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability change big hit (the number of probability changes). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state in which probability variation control is performed, a state in which time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed in which two short-term open rounds are executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is achieved. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols.

In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In the present embodiment, a case where the round number promotion effect is executed in any one of the fanfare effect, the effect of round 1 or the effect of round 4 is illustrated.
In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal big hit is not provided, but after the fixed decorative symbol that is the big hit combination corresponding to the normal big win is derived and displayed when the normal big hit is provided, the period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started, a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the main image display device 5 and the sub image display. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by electrical components for rendering such as the device 50, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 is used for effects such as display operation in the main image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. It has a function of determining control contents for causing a part to execute a predetermined performance operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decoration symbol variably displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved memory number addition designation command (total reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and a determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command and the big hit type, The variable category can be recognized based on the value set in the category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (main image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). It is done. Hereinafter, the effect control command used for controlling the image display operation in the main image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used for controlling the audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and the light emission operation of the lamp 9 The effect control command used for controlling (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the fluctuation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability high base state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability low base state. ing. Specifically, in the low probability low base state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (values in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. Yes. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy and high-base state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of the determined values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than in the first special figure. In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (clash accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is provided, in the case of the second special figure game, the case is the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. The holding data (first special figure holding information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. The RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the main image display device 5, and the presentation control CPU 120 update numerical data indicating random values independently of each other. A random number circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the main image display device 5 or the sub image display device 50, and an information signal (effect sound) indicating a command to the audio control board 13. Wiring for transmitting a signal), wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 may be connected to a wiring for transmitting from the cross key an operation detection signal indicating that a player's operation action on the cross key (not shown) has been detected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display is displayed. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, whether the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is changed to another display mode. In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. In each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  In addition, when executing an active display change effect (described later) for changing a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 determines whether to execute the active display change effect as a table relating to the active display change effect. Therefore, an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. The change effect effect form determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect.

  In addition, the ROM 121 uses the effect control CPU 120 to control the effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the main image display device 5, the sub image display device 50, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the main image display device 5 such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the main image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the main image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed to receive the operation on the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B during the operation effective period, which is the period during which the operation is effective, and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 9B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (main image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of states that can be updated in accordance with an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the main image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. Types of flags are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the main image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value that is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number is provided. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Accordingly, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data configuring the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 10C, the second start opening winning designation command and the symbol designation command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the prefetching notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 is updated so as to add 1 to the number of reserved special figure storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening prize designation command set in this way is executed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notifying command set in this way is executed when, for example, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103, for example, confirms the state of the time flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, etc. The current gaming state at is identified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on by confirming the state of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, and the probability variation flag is off. When the time reduction flag is in the on state, the time reduction state is specified. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the probability change flag is on and the time reduction flag is on, for example, depending on whether each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or off. If the state is a state, the gaming state is identified as a high-probability base state, and if the probability variation flag is on and the time flag is off, the gaming state is identified as a high-probability low base state. If the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, the low accuracy high base state is identified. If both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off, the low probability low base state (normal State). That is, the CPU 103 identifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag and the time-shortage flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or the stored memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variation category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) using a certain variation category determination table among the above four types. FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table by another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 17A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 17B to 17D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIG. 17A to FIG. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  FIG. 17A shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (a variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B), a variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, shortening / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Also, in the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the fluctuation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 15B to the effect control board 12 in accordance with the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S412). S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the change category, the random value MR5 for determining the change pattern is extracted and stored, so that in the change pattern setting process in step S111, the start win is received. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. If the jackpot flag is in an on state, the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is open has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by the effect devices such as the main image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9 elapses. And a game state transition process after jackpot for setting to start probability change control and time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the decided values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “16R probability variable jackpot” and “8R probability variable jackpot”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be made (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, the big hit type buffer value may be “1” if the big hit type is “16R probability variable big hit”, and “2” if the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the main image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the control board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. In the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 19A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 19B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 19C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 19D to 19H.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start presentation waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The variation counter is the number of executions of the special figure game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (probability variation number) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The number of STs (the number of probability changes) and the number of time reductions are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 12 and 22).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the process of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462), and sets the time-saving count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S <b> 311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 12, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, a command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is executed, so that the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) is set. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. When these processes are executed, the variable control result notification command or the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) determines “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, the ST number (number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are both 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process (step S70) as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in step S70 of FIG. 23 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and effects control. Register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the substrate 12 is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the main image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

After performing the effect control process in step S75, the effect control CPU 120 executes the simultaneous effect process (step S76). Here, “simultaneous production” will be described. The simultaneous performance in the present embodiment is an effect mode illustrated as an example of a specific effect, and is an effect mode that is executed all at once when a predetermined condition is established in a plurality of gaming machines installed in a game store. is there. The case where the predetermined condition for executing the simultaneous performance is satisfied is, for example, a time when the current time becomes a predetermined time as a time for performing the simultaneous performance. In the present embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 measures the current time and determines whether or not the current time is a time for executing the simultaneous effect (hereinafter referred to as “simultaneous effect execution time”). To do. It is assumed that the start time and the end time are set as the simultaneous performance execution time. The simultaneous performance is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) from the start time to the end time. The effect executed in the simultaneous effect is executed using effect devices such as the main image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9, for example. By simultaneously displaying the same video on the display screen of the main image display device 5 of a plurality of gaming machines installed in the amusement store, simultaneously outputting the same music or the like from the speaker 8, or aligning the lighting state of the lamp 9 It is possible to improve the production effect at a game store where a plurality of gaming machines that perform simultaneous production are installed.
The simultaneous production in step S76 is repeatedly executed every time the timer interrupt flag is turned on in the production control main process (step S70) (step S72; YES). That is, the simultaneous effect process is performed regardless of the state of the effect process flag described later in the effect post-production process process in step S75, that is, the gaming machine is variably displayed, is waiting for a special figure, or is a big hit. This process is always executed regardless of whether it exists. Therefore, even if the state of the effect process flag is different among the plurality of gaming machines, the simultaneous effect is similarly performed. Details of the simultaneous effect process in step S76 will be described later with reference to FIG.
Following the simultaneous effect process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and the effect random number counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is used as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  When the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning prize (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; NO), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. Further, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). , A process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command is received as a received command, and a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H are determined. The process to perform is performed.

  After performing the winning effect determination process in step S150, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes in steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, a process for displaying a process for executing a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the decoration on the main image display device 5 corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of symbols and other various effects, the process of determining a fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol or the type of display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the active display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect) It is out. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the main image display device 5 based on the read control data (process data) and displays it on the screen. Various effect controls are executed, such as a control for outputting an effect sound from the speaker 8 by outputting to the control board 13 and a control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter. Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect and updates the value of the effect process flag to “4” when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, and the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol. In this case, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening release notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of chances of change) and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first change start command (or a second change start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

When it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1002; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration performance flag is set to ON (step S1006), and the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is performed. Process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and an effect control process timer is started (step S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started.
Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.
In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 as a condition for starting a demonstration presentation. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined operation (for example, stick controller 31A). Or a predetermined operation using the push button 31B or the like) is determined (step S1012). If it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. In other words, the demonstration production is continued.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect adjustment display (step S1013).

The effect adjustment display is an aspect of effect adjustment means. In the production adjustment display, the production means is adjusted by “display”. The effect adjustment display is executed, for example, by displaying an icon or the like indicating the setting status of the effect means on the display screen of the main image display device 5.
The production means is, for example, sound output means such as a speaker 8 and light emitting means such as an LED 9. When the effect means is a sound output means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, an icon display for volume adjustment displayed on the main image display device 5. When the effect means is a light emitting means, the effect adjustment display is, for example, a brightness adjustment icon display displayed on the main image display device 5.
The player visually confirms the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the main image display device 5, while using the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B described in FIG. Adjust volume, brightness, etc.

  Appropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like as the effect means and appropriate luminance of the LED 9 as the effect means improve the effect for the player. On the other hand, an inappropriate volume output from the speaker 8 or the like or an inappropriate brightness of the LED 9 may cause a disadvantage such as discomfort to the player.

The effect adjustment display is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 based on the process data described in FIG. That is, the control content of the rendering operation such as display, change, and deletion of the rendering adjustment display is preset in the process data. For example, in the process data, it is possible to set the control content for displaying the setting state of the sound volume and the brightness of the effect means by an icon or the like. In the process data, control details for changing the effect adjustment display (increase / decrease in volume display, etc.) when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key, etc. to change the volume and brightness settings are set. Can do. The process data includes a control for erasing the effect adjustment display displayed on the display screen of the main image display device 5 when the player operates the push button 31B, the cross key, or the like or when a predetermined time has elapsed. The contents can be set.
After executing the process of step S1013, the variable display start waiting process (step S170) is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on. Determination is made (step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026), and the variable display start waiting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (it skips), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After the updated value is updated to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; YES), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. , The non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the designated variation pattern sets the decorative display variable display mode to “non-reach (loss)” (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-” in FIG. 5). 2 "" PA2-3 ") or not (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; YES), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the non-reach combination (step S524). ). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. .

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the reach combination (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, etc., stop display is performed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the main image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. The decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the main image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S522; NO), that is, when the special figure display result is “big hit (16R positive variable big hit, 8R positive variable big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 Determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols (final stop symbols) constituting the jackpot combination (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determination symbol determination table, etc., it is stopped and displayed on the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the main image display device 5. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined.

  When determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 determines the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit), whether or not there is a promotion effect, etc. The design may be determined.

  As a specific example, for example, a jackpot combination dedicated to 16R probability variation jackpot (for example, three odd-numbered identical decorative symbols arranged in parallel) and a jackpot combination dedicated to 8R probability variation jackpot (for example, an even number of identical ornamental symbols represent In the mode of 3), in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, either the big hit combination exclusive for 16R probability variation big hit or the big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit may be determined as the confirmed decorative design. . At this time, when the big hit combination dedicated to the 8R probability variable big hit is determined to be a confirmed decorative symbol, it is only necessary to notify the player that the 16R probability big hit is made until the end of the 8th round as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of 8R probability variation big hit, it is only necessary to determine whether it is a big hit combination exclusively for 8R probability variation big hit as a definite decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise accuracy) is provided and the special figure display result is “big hit (2R probability variation big hit (accuracy variation)”, the effect control is performed. The CPU 120 may determine a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) corresponding to a 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability).

  After executing any one of the processes from step S525 to step S528, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digest process (step S530). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed).

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of area 5HL is displayed in active display area AHA. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Also, in the process of step S530, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the pending digest process in step S530, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation as a use pattern (step S532). That is, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 as the usage pattern.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the two-dimensional code display as a use pattern (step S533).
The effect control pattern set in the process of step S533 includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation for displaying the two-dimensional code in the sub-image display device 50 described with reference to FIG. For example, the control content of the set presentation operation includes, for example, whether or not a 2D code is displayed, the display timing of the 2D code, the type of information included in the 2D code, and the like. That is, in step S533, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect aspect related to the two-dimensional code display, such as whether or not the two-dimensional code is displayed, the display timing of the two-dimensional code, and the type of information included in the two-dimensional code. An effect control pattern is determined according to the effect mode. The effect mode related to the two-dimensional code display is determined based on, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. The variation patterns transmitted from the main board 11 exemplified in the present embodiment are 24 types from PA1-1 to PB5-4 as described with reference to FIG. Whether or not the presentation control CPU 120 displays the two-dimensional code based on information such as presence / absence of big hit, reach type (non-reach, normal reach, or super reach) included in the transmitted variation pattern. To decide. In addition, when displaying the two-dimensional code, the effect control CPU 120 displays the two-dimensional code type and the display timing of the two-dimensional code corresponding to the effect mode of the effect device executed based on the variation pattern. The effect aspect which concerns on is determined. The CPU 120 for effect control determines the two-dimensional code to be displayed based on the effect aspect related to the determined two-dimensional code display, and displays an effect control pattern including process data for displaying the determined two-dimensional code on the effect device. set.

  In the embodiment described below, the case where the sub-image display device 50 is used as an effect device that displays a two-dimensional code is exemplified. Moreover, the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub image display device 50 illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code is read by the camera of the portable terminal operated by the player. Further, the mobile terminal exemplifies a case in which “game information” is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal to notify the player based on the read two-dimensional code.

  In the embodiment described below, the “information relating to the game” notified to the player is a history of effects executed in the variation of the gaming machine. Information on the game includes, for example, the type of the notice effect (“Notice A” as the notice name), the type of reach (“Leach A” as the reach name), the success / failure result (“big hit”, “lost” ”, Etc.), and the information of the effect mode selected from the effect modes such as the jackpot type (such as“ hit A ”as the jackpot type) and displayed on the screen (mobile screen) of the mobile terminal. The player is notified of information related to the game via the mobile screen. Further, the information related to the game may include information for informing in advance the effect mode of the gaming machine to be executed in the future. Further, the information related to the game may include information related to the past game history such as the number of fluctuations, the jackpot history, and the number of acquired balls. Further, the information related to the game may be information by characters and symbols, information by images such as still images and moving images, and information by sounds.

  Moreover, in embodiment described below, the information regarding the game displayed on the display screen of a portable terminal shall be preserve | saved at the portable terminal as display data predetermined based on the production aspect of the gaming machine 1. . The display data includes data indicating the type of information relating to the game to be notified to the player, and data indicating timing for notifying the player of the information regarding the game. The two-dimensional code displayed on the sub-image display device 50 includes information for selecting display data stored in the mobile terminal, that is, information for selecting an effect mode for displaying “information about a game”. . The mobile terminal that has read the two-dimensional code selects display data based on the information contained in the two-dimensional code, displays information about the game on the display screen based on the display data, and notifies the player. To do.

  In the process of step S533, for example, when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is PB4-1 (super reach α (big hit)), the presentation control CPU 120 is information corresponding to the variation pattern of PB4-1. Is selected, and the selected two-dimensional code is set as process data of the production control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 displays the two-dimensional code set by executing the effect control described later on the sub-image display device 50 so as to be readable by the portable terminal of the player. When the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub-image display device 50 by the portable terminal, the portable terminal selects display data for notifying information related to the game based on the information included in the two-dimensional code. Based on the selected display data, the information on the super reach α and the information on the jackpot, which are information related to the game corresponding to the effect mode of PB4-1, are displayed on the display screen of the portable terminal at predetermined timings.

  In the present embodiment, the display timing of the information related to the game on the mobile terminal is stored in advance in the display data stored in advance in the mobile terminal as described above, and the mobile terminal displays the display selected by the two-dimensional code. The case of displaying data was illustrated. However, for example, the two-dimensional code may include information on the type of information displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal and timing information for displaying information related to the game. If the information about the type of information displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal and the timing of displaying information about the game are included in the two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal that read the two-dimensional code is included in the two-dimensional code. Display control of information related to the game to be displayed on the mobile screen may be performed based on information on the type of information related to the game to be played and timing information for displaying information related to the game.

The effect control pattern set in the process of step S533 is set together with the effect control pattern set in step S532, and the effect device is controlled based on both effect control patterns. However, for example, when the effect devices used in both effect control patterns overlap, the effect control pattern set in step S532 may be replaced with the effect control pattern set in step S533 and executed. .
In addition, when it is determined that the two-dimensional code is not displayed, the CPU 120 for effect control may end the process of step S533 without setting the effect control pattern.

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S532 or step S533 (step S534), and starts the effect control process timer (step S535). ) Control of effect devices (effect components) such as the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 50 is performed according to the contents of the process data (step S536). In the process of step S536, when the effect control pattern related to the display of the two-dimensional code is set in step S533, the effect aspect related to the two-dimensional code display is executed.
Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (the special diagram variation time shown in FIG. 5) in the variation time timer (step S537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears the first start prize reception command buffer 194A or the second start prize reception command buffer 194B (step S538). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands being The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the removed command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.In the process of step S538, according to the deletion or shift of the command, The information stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 is also deleted or shifted, and then the value of the production process flag corresponds to the production processing during variable display. After the value is updated to “2” (step S539), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the variable display effect process in step S <b> 172 executed in the effect control process process of step S <b> 75 in FIG. 25 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect process.
In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control process timer (step S601), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S602). The variable time timer is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time, and is a special figure fluctuation time set in accordance with each fluctuation pattern described in FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out. (Step S603). When the effect control process timer times out (step S603; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value of the effect control process timer of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S532 or step S533. Then, the effect control process timer is started (step S604), and the effect device control process is executed according to the content of the next process data (step S605). The effect device control process in step S605 starts the effect according to each process data, and is repeatedly executed until the process timer times out and the effect device control process based on the next process data is started. Shall be. In other words, when the effect control process timer has not timed out in the process of step S603, the effect device control process of step S605, which has been started, is repeatedly executed. In the present embodiment, effect control related to the display of the two-dimensional code set in step S533 is executed in the process of step S605. The production related to the display of the two-dimensional code is also controlled based on the process data started by the process timer.

On the other hand, if the effect control process timer has not timed out (step S603; NO), or after executing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step S606). ). When the variable time timer has timed out (step S606; YES), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S607). The effect process during variable display is terminated.
On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (step S606; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display effect processing without updating the value of the effect process flag.

Next, the waiting process per special figure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure waiting process executed in step S173 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the special symbol waiting process (step S173) shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed is set (step S651). .

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set (step S651; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S524, step S525, or step S528 of the variable display start setting process (step S171) shown in FIG. Control is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol (out-of-line symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S652). The effect control CPU 120 may perform control to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmed command from the game control microcomputer 100.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol display flag is set (step S651; YES), the production control CPU 120 proceeds to step S657. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a big hit symbol is displayed as a decorative symbol stop symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set (step S656), and after receiving a hit start designation command (fanfare command), in step S658. The stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S651 is a stage where the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol in step S652 Without moving to step S657.

Subsequent to step S652, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the stop symbol is a big hit symbol (step S653). If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol (step S653; NO), the game state setting process at the time of change is executed (step S654). In the game state setting process at the time of change, for example, the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is determined by checking the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 and the like. This is a process for determining whether or not the current gaming state is a low probability low base state.
After executing the process of step S654, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start wait process (step S655), and waits for the special figure in step S173. The process ends.

  When the stop symbol display flag is set (step S651; YES), or after the processing of step S656 is executed, that is, when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, the effect control CPU 120 starts a hit. It is determined whether a designated command (fanfare command) has been received (step S657). If the hit start designation command (fanfare command) has not been received (step S657; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the special figure waiting process without updating the value of the effect process flag.

  On the other hand, when the hit start designation command (fanfare command) is received (step S657; YES), the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S658). By resetting the stop symbol display flag, it is determined in step S651 that the stop symbol display flag is not set (step S651; NO), and the process of displaying the decorative symbol stop symbol in step S652 is executed. Will be able to.

Subsequent to step S658, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the two-dimensional code display (step S661).
The effect control pattern set in the process of step S661 is an effect operation for displaying a two-dimensional code in the sub-image display device 50 described with reference to FIG. 2 in the same manner as the effect control pattern set in the process of step S533. Contains data indicating control content. That is, in step S661, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect aspect related to the two-dimensional code display, such as whether or not the two-dimensional code is displayed, the display timing of the two-dimensional code, and the type of information included in the two-dimensional code. An effect control pattern related to the two-dimensional code display is determined according to the effect mode. The effect mode related to the two-dimensional code display is determined based on, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. The production control CPU 120 determines the production mode related to the two-dimensional code display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, and the like. can do. That is, the CPU 120 for effect control includes, for example, information such as jackpot, reach type (normal reach or super reach), or jackpot type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, etc.) included in the transmitted variation pattern. The effect mode related to the two-dimensional code display is determined based on the above. The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern including process data for displaying on the effect device a two-dimensional code corresponding to the effect aspect related to the determined two-dimensional code display.

  For example, when the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is a 16R probability change big hit, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the promotion effect, and executes the effect corresponding to the 16R probability change big hit as it is, from the normal big hit. It is possible to select an effect mode when executing a promotion effect to a probable big hit and when executing a promotion effect from 8R big hit to 16R big hit. In the process of step S661, the CPU 120 for effect control can set the effect control pattern by selecting a two-dimensional code corresponding to the effect mode to be executed (presence / absence of promotion effect, type of promotion effect, etc.).

  In the present embodiment, the effect device is controlled based on the effect control pattern set in the process of step S661, and the effect device is controlled based on the effect control pattern set in the process of step S664. To do. That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the two-dimensional code on the sub-image display device 50 in the jackpot start process (step S174) based on the effect control pattern set in step S661, and is set in the process of step S664. The fanfare effect can be executed in the big hit start process (step S174) based on the effect control pattern. However, the effect control CPU 120 may end the process of step S661 without setting the effect control pattern when it is determined not to display the two-dimensional code in the process of step S661.

  Subsequent to step S661, the effect control CPU 120 selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S664), and starts an effect control process timer (step S665). That is, the production control CPU 120 sets the production control pattern corresponding to the hit start designation command (fanfare command) as a use pattern, sets the initial value of the production control process timer of the process data of the set production control pattern, Start the production control process timer. Thereby, a fanfare effect is executed. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit start process (step S666), and ends the special figure waiting process.

Next, the gaming state setting process at the time of variation in step S654 will be described using FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the gaming state setting process at the time of change executed in step S654 of the waiting process per special figure (step S173) shown in FIG.
In the game state setting process at the time of change shown in FIG. 30 (step S654), the effect control CPU 120 checks the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 described in FIG. Thus, the state of one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is determined, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S701). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in the off state, that is, in the low probability low base state (normal state) (step S701; YES), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation gaming state setting process as it is. To do. On the other hand, when one or both of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are in the on state, that is, when the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state (step S701; NO), the effect control counter The value of the effect number counter stored in the setting unit 193 is updated, for example, by adding 1 (step S702).

  Note that the effect number counter on the effect control board 12 side is the effect number counter on the effect control board 12 side in the same manner that the fluctuation number counter on the main board 11 side counts the number of STs (probable change number) and the number of time reductions on the main board 11 side. It is assumed that the number of STs (probability variation) and the number of time reductions are counted. In this embodiment, separately from the main board 11 side, the number of STs (probability change number) and the number of time reductions are set also on the production control board 12 side (specifically, after the big hit end processing shown in FIG. 25) (In step S177, the number of STs (probable variation) and the number of time reductions are set) In other words, in the present embodiment, the number of STs (the number of times of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are managed on the side of the effect control board 12 in addition to the main board 11 side.

  Subsequent to the process of step S702, the CPU 120 for effect control reads the ST number (probability change number) set in the post-hit end post-processing (step S177) shown in FIG. 25 (step S703), and the big hit end post-process (step S177). ) Is read out (step S704).

Subsequent to the processing in step S704, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state) (step S705). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the current gaming state is the high probability state when the probability variation flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in the on state. In step S705, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high probability state (step S705; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect number counter is based on the ST number (probability change number) read in step S703. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the indicated value (for example, 70 times) (step S706). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability change) (step S706; YES), the effect control CPU 120 has a probability change flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. Is turned off, and the gaming state is set to the low probability state (step S707).
Here, setting to the low-accuracy state changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as a probability change flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. The state (information such as the probability variation flag stored on the main board 11 side) related to the determination of whether or not to make a big hit is not changed.

If it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state after executing the process of step S707 (step S705; NO), or the value of the production number counter is not larger than the value indicated by the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S706; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S708). The effect control CPU 120 determines that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) when the time reduction flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is in the on state. In step S708, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S708; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the effect number counter is based on the short time count read in step S704. It is determined whether or not the value is larger than the indicated value (for example, 70 times) (step S709). When it is determined whether the value of the production number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (for example, 70 times) (step S709; YES), the production control CPU 120 sets the production control flag. The short time flag provided in the unit 191 is turned off, and the gaming state is set to the low base state (step S710).
Note that setting to the low base state here changes the state recognized by the CPU 120 for effect control (information such as the time flag stored on the effect control board 12 side) and is recognized by the CPU 103. In other words, the state related to the determination as to whether or not to make a big hit (information such as a time-short flag stored on the main board 11 side) is not changed.

  After executing the process of step S710, when the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S708; NO), it is determined that the value of the performance number counter is not larger than the value indicated by the short time number In the case (step S709; NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current gaming state has become the normal state (low probability low base state), that is, as in step S701, the probability variation flag is in the off state and the time is shortened. It is determined whether or not the flag is off (step S711).

  When it is determined in step S711 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S711; YES), the effect control CPU 120 clears the set value of the ST count (number of times of probability change) to “0” (step S712). The set value of the number of times is cleared to “0” (step S713), and further, the value of the effect number counter is cleared to “0” (step S714).

After executing the process of step S714 or when it is determined in step S711 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S711; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the variation gaming state setting process of step S654. To do.
Above, description of the game state setting process at the time of a change using FIG. 30 is complete | finished.

Next, the big hit starting process in step S174 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit start process executed in step S174 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the big hit starting process shown in FIG. 31 (step S174), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, that is, whether or not the round 1 start timing has come (step 1). S751). When the notification command during opening of the big prize opening is not received (step S751; NO), that is, when it is not the start timing of round 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process timer to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S753). The effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (the main image display device 5, the sub image display device 50, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of the process data n (step S754). Thereby, before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, the big hit symbol is displayed and the fanfare effect is executed.
In the process of step S754, when the effect control pattern related to the display of the two-dimensional code is set in step S661, the effect mode related to the display of the two-dimensional code is executed. That is, the effect relating to the two-dimensional code display can be set as an effect control pattern together with the fanfare effect.

  Subsequently, when the effect control process timer times out (step S756; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control process of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S664. The set value of the timer is set, the production control process timer is started (step S757), and the production device (production component) such as the main image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step S758). ). When the effect control pattern related to the display of the two-dimensional code is set in step S661, the process data executed in the process of step S758 includes the control data related to the display of the two-dimensional code. A two-dimensional code is displayed on the sub-image display device 50. After executing the process of step S758, the effect control CPU 120 ends the jackpot start process.

  When the notification command during opening of the big prize opening is received (step S751; YES), that is, when the start timing of round 1 is reached, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect during round. (Step S761).

After executing the process of step S761, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the two-dimensional code display (step S762).
The effect control pattern set in step S762 is similar to the effect control pattern set in step S661, in the effect operation for displaying the two-dimensional code in the sub-image display device 50 described in FIG. Contains data indicating control content. That is, in step S762, the effect control CPU 120 determines an effect aspect related to two-dimensional code display, and determines an effect control pattern related to two-dimensional code display according to the determined effect aspect. The effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern including process data for displaying on the effect device a two-dimensional code corresponding to the effect aspect related to the determined two-dimensional code display.

  For example, when the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command is a 16R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the promotion effect and performs an effect corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit, as in the process of step S661. When performing as it is, you may select the effect mode in the case of executing the promotion effect from the normal jackpot to the probability variation jackpot, and the promotion effect from the 8R jackpot to the 16R jackpot. In the process of step S762, the CPU 120 for effect control can set the effect control pattern by selecting a two-dimensional code corresponding to the effect mode to be executed (presence of promotion effect, type of promotion effect, etc.).

  Here, the process of step S762 is to set the effect control pattern for displaying the two-dimensional code at the time of the fanfare effect in that the effect control pattern related to the two-dimensional code display executed during the round is set. Different from processing. In the present embodiment, the display of the two-dimensional code exemplifies a case where both a case where the fanfare effect is displayed and a case where the two-dimensional code is displayed during the round are executed. However, only one of the case where the fanfare effect is displayed and the case where the fanfare effect is displayed may be performed. The effect control CPU 120 may end the process of step S762 without setting the effect control pattern when it is determined not to display the two-dimensional code in the process of step S762.

  After executing the process of step S762, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect control process timer (step S763). The effect control CPU 120 starts the effect control process timer by setting the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern. Thus, the special effect or the normal effect is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state in the big hit gaming state.

After executing the process of step S763, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S764), and ends the jackpot start process of step S174. .
Above, description of the big hit start process of step S174 using FIG. 31 is complete | finished.

Next, the in-round processing in step S175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the in-round processing executed in step S175 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG.
In the in-round process (step S175) shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification command after opening the big winning opening has been received, that is, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state in the big hit gaming state. It is determined whether or not the start timing of the period (interval period) is reached (step S801). After the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” corresponding to the processing during the round in step S764 in FIG. 31, the period before receiving the notification command after opening the big prize opening (step S801; NO) is , During the jackpot round. The processes in steps S802 to S808 are processes executed during the big hit round.

  When the notification command after the special winning opening is not received (step S801; NO), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control process timer (step S803). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data n selected in step S761 or step S762 in FIG. 31 (step S804).

  After executing the process of step S804, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out (step S808). When the effect control process timer times out (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting value of the effect control process timer of the next process data in the effect control pattern set in step S761 or step S762. The production control process timer is set (step S807), and the production device such as the main image display device 5 is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step S808). Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round processing in step S175.

  On the other hand, when the notification command after opening the big prize opening is received (step S801; YES), that is, when it is the start timing of the interval period, the effect control CPU 120 provides the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect after the round. Is set (step S811). The effect control pattern corresponding to the effect after round set in step S810 includes process data for controlling the effect device according to the effect mode executed during the interval period, for example.

  After executing the process of step S811, the effect control CPU 120 starts an effect control process timer (step S813). The effect control CPU 120 starts the effect control process timer by setting the initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern selected in the process of step S811 or step S812. Thus, the special effect or the normal effect is executed when the interval period is reached in the big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, special effects that are continued during the interval period. A case where the special effect is continued during the round and is started after the start of the interval period as a new special effect is illustrated. However, the special effect may be continued without a break due to the start of the interval period without temporarily ending the special effect in which the music is selected and executed by the player during the round.

After executing the process of step S813, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the post-round process (step S814), and ends the in-round process of step S175. .
Above, description of the process in round of step S175 using FIG. 32 is complete | finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, description will be given of an effect mode when the effect control pattern corresponding to the two-dimensional code display set in step S533 in FIG. 27 is executed in step S605 in FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the display screen of the main image display device 5, the display screen of the sub image display device 50, and the display screen of the mobile terminal during execution of variable display. 33 (a) to (d1) or (d2) illustrate the display in the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 50 in time series, and FIGS. 33 (a) to (c1). Or (c2) describes the display on the portable terminal in time series.
In the present embodiment, the main image display device 5 executes an effect mode that performs display such as decorative pattern variation display, notice A display, reach A display, jackpot A display, and the like exemplified as specific effects. Shall. Further, it is assumed that the sub image display device 50 is disposed on the upper portion of the main image display device 5 as shown in FIG. In FIG. 33, the sub image display device 50 will be described as not performing an operation of moving the position.

  In FIG. 33 (a), on the display screen of the main image display device 5, a decorative design that is changing during execution of variable display is displayed. It is assumed that the two-dimensional code is not displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50 during the change of the decorative design. At this time, an image other than the two-dimensional code may be displayed on the display screen of the sub-image display device 50.

Next, in FIG. 33 (b), the image of the notice A is displayed on the display screen of the main image display device 5, and the two-dimensional code is displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50. Since the two-dimensional code is not displayed on the main image display device 5 that executes the specific effect but is displayed on the sub-image display device 50, the specific effect in the main image display device 5 is not hindered and the effect is improved. It becomes possible.
In the present embodiment, a case where a two-dimensional code is displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50 while the main image display device 5 executes the effect mode of the notice A is illustrated.
The notice A is an effect mode that is executed by the main image display device 5 based on the effect control pattern set in step S532 of FIG. In the process of step S532, the effect control CPU 120 may select the notice effect of the notice A from, for example, a plurality of notice effects. Note that in the present embodiment, a plurality of notice effects are provided with different signs such as notice A and notice B to indicate different effects.

In FIG. 33C, the display on the main image display device 5 is switched from the notice A to the reach A, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub image display device 50 is erased. Reach A indicates a production aspect of one reach effect executed from among a plurality of types of reach.
FIG. 33 (d <b> 1) shows that an image corresponding to the big hit A is displayed on the main image display device 5 after the effect of reach A. The jackpot A indicates an effect mode of one jackpot effect executed from a plurality of types of jackpot types determined based on the jackpot type determination table illustrated in FIG. For example, the big hit A can be a 16R probability change big hit, and the big hit B can be an 8R probability change big hit. However, the big hit A may be a type of the big hit effect to be executed instead of the big hit type. For example, it may be the type of character or the like displayed on the display screen of the main image display device 5 in the pre-round effect.
On the other hand, FIG. 33 (d2) shows that an image corresponding to the loss is displayed on the main image display device 5 after the effect of reach A. The jackpot A or loss effect is executed based on the received variation pattern designation command.

It is assumed that the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub image display device 50 in FIG. 33B can be read by a mobile terminal, for example. The player can read the information regarding the game included in the two-dimensional code by photographing the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub-image display device 50 with the camera of the portable terminal. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which information on specific effects shown in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (d) is notified to the player as information relating to the game included in the two-dimensional code.
33 (a) to (c), the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub-image display device 50 in FIG. 33 (b) is read by the portable terminal, and information relating to the game included in the read two-dimensional code is stored in the portable terminal. The case where it is displayed in time series on the display screen is explained. On the display screen of the portable terminal, the specific effects executed by the main image display device 5 of the notice A, reach A, and big hit (or lost) described in FIGS. 33A to 33D are displayed in time series. Shall be.

  FIG. 33A shows a case where the specific effect of the notice A is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal in the information regarding the game included in the two-dimensional code. The specific effect executed next to the notice A indicates that the content has not been notified to the player by a blackish display (hereinafter referred to as “black display”). The black display is erased by the player's operation, and information relating to the game is notified to the notifier by characters or the like appearing in the black display portion. For example, if the display screen of the mobile terminal is a touch panel, the black display is erased by the player performing an operation such as tapping or swiping on the black display. The character string “notice A” illustrated in FIG. 33A may be displayed as a result of erasing the black display. The black display may be erased by, for example, gradually increasing the transparency of the black display by the player's operation and gradually displaying information about the game. Further, it may be an effect mode in which the black-colored display is gradually erased when the player swipes the black-colored display portion several times, and the scratch card is scraped.

  When the player erases the black display next to the notice A, the character string “reach A” shown in FIG. Here, when the notice A is displayed on the main image display device 5, the player cannot determine from the notice A display whether or not the player will next reach A. Accordingly, if the reach A is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal before the reach A effect is started on the main image display device 5, the player is notified in advance that the reach A effect is executed on the gaming machine. You may find that you are less interested.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the reach A shown in FIG. 33B is displayed is set to be after the timing at which the effect of reach A is started on the main image display device 5. Specifically, when the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub image display device 50 is read by the portable terminal and the black display of reach A can be erased, the effect of reach A is started on the main image display device 5. To be later. For example, a display program having a predetermined timing at which black display can be erased may be prepared on the mobile terminal, and the display program may be executed based on information included in the two-dimensional code. Details of the timing of reading the two-dimensional code and the timing of display on the portable terminal will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 33 (C1) shows a case where the player erases the black display next to reach A on the display screen of the portable terminal and displays the big hit A. The display of the big hit A displayed on the portable terminal is displayed after the effect of the big hit A shown in FIG. That is, the next black display of reach A can be erased after the effect of big hit A is started in the main image display device 5. By displaying the big hit A on the mobile terminal after the big hit A effect is started in the main image display device 5, the player is not notified in advance that the big hit A effect is executed. The effect of the big hit A may be an effect of notifying that a big hit is given, for example, in addition to the display of the stoppage of the big hit decorative symbol.

On the other hand, FIG. 33 (C 2) shows a case where the player erases the black display next to reach A on the display screen of the mobile terminal and displays a loss. The display of the loss displayed on the mobile terminal is displayed after the effect of the loss shown in FIG. 33 (d2) is started to be executed on the main image display device 5. By displaying the losing on the mobile terminal after the losing effect is started in the main image display device 5, the player is not notified in advance that the losing effect is executed. The effect of losing may be, for example, an effect of notifying that losing occurs, in addition to the display of the stop of the decorative pattern of losing.
The description of the correspondence between the display screen of the main image display device 5, the display screen of the sub image display device 50, and the display screen of the mobile terminal during execution of variable display is ended with FIG. 33.

  Next, the correspondence between the rendering mode of the main image display device 5 and the display of the mobile terminal according to the reading timing of the two-dimensional code displayed during execution of variable display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a timing chart showing the correspondence between the display mode of the variable display and the display of the mobile terminal based on the reading timing of the two-dimensional code displayed during the execution of the variable display.

  In FIG. 34A, the main image display device 5 executes an effect during execution of variable display in the time series of t101 to t105. When the main image display device 5 starts variable display at t101, the main image display device 5 starts changing the decorative design. Next, the execution of the notice A is started at t202. Next, at t103, the effect of reach A is started. Next, at t104, the decorative design is stopped. Further, at t105, the variable display of the next cycle is started. In other words, a variable display effect of one cycle is executed from t101 to t105.

  In FIG. 34 (b), the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code A at t111 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect of the notice A in the main image display device 5. The sub image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code A in the period from t111 to t112 in the period from t102 to t103 during which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of the notice A. That is, the player can read the two-dimensional code A displayed during the period from t111 to t112 with the portable terminal. FIG. 34 (c) to be described next shows the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code A is read at the shortest timing (≈t111) when the two-dimensional code A is displayed, while FIG. d) shows the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code A is read at the longest timing (≈t112) when the two-dimensional code A is displayed. In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, FIG. 34C will be described on the assumption that a two-dimensional code is read at t111, and FIG. 34D is a case where a two-dimensional code is read at t112.

  In FIG. 34C, when the two-dimensional code A is read at t111, the portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code A, and the game is played on the portable screen based on information included in the two-dimensional code. Information display (notification) is executed.

The notification of information related to a game is based on the information included in the two-dimensional code, and the type of notification information and the notification timing of each notification information are determined. For example, a plurality of programs for notifying information related to games in which the types of notification information and the notification timing of each notification information are predetermined are stored in a portable terminal, and one program is stored based on information included in a two-dimensional code. It may be selected and executed. Hereinafter, in the description of FIGS. 34 to 40, the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub-image display device 50 is the type of notification information and the notification timing of each notification information that are executed by the mobile terminal as described above. Includes information for selecting a program for notifying information relating to a predetermined game.
On the other hand, since the timing at which the player reads the two-dimensional code is arbitrary, the display timing of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen varies depending on the timing at which the player reads the two-dimensional code. Therefore, in the program for informing information relating to the game stored in the portable terminal, information relating to the game executed on the main image display device 5 is transmitted through the portable screen on the assumption that the player reads the two-dimensional code in the shortest time. The timing for notifying information regarding the game is determined in advance so that the player is not notified in advance. As a result, no matter what timing the player reads the two-dimensional code during the two-dimensional code display period, the information about the game will not be notified first through the portable terminal, and the prevention of interest will be prevented. Can do.

The portable terminal displays the notice A as information on the game on the portable screen at t121 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t111 when the two-dimensional code is read. In the present embodiment, as notification of information related to a game, display of information related to a game on a mobile screen is exemplified. Displaying information related to a game on a mobile screen includes enabling display of information related to a game by the display method for erasing the black display described with reference to FIG. That is, at t121, the black display may be displayed in an erasable state.
At t122, the portable terminal displays information regarding the notice A and reach A games on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays reach A at t122, which is a timing after t103 when reach A is executed in the main image display device 5. The timing of t112 when the reach A is displayed is determined by a predetermined delay time set in advance based on information included in the two-dimensional code A as described above. That is, t112 is a time when a predetermined time elapses after the two-dimensional code is read.

In FIG. 34D, when the player reads the two-dimensional code A at t112, the portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code A, and the portable terminal carries it at t131 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t112. A notice A is displayed on the screen as information about the game.
The portable terminal displays the information regarding the notice A and the reach A game on the portable screen at t132 when a predetermined time elapses after the two-dimensional code is read. Since t132 when the two-dimensional code is read with the longest time is later than t122 when the two-dimensional code is read with the shortest time, t132 when the reach A is executed in the main image display device 5 from t122. Further later. Therefore, in the case of reading at the longest, information regarding the effect (game) executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance through the mobile screen. Also in the following description, whether or not information related to the effect executed on the main image display device 5 is notified to the player in advance through the mobile screen will be described when the two-dimensional code is read in the shortest time. .

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even when the two-dimensional code is read at t112, the display of the notice A and the reach A on the mobile screen ends at t133, which is the timing before t105 when the change ends. . If the information about the game displayed on the mobile screen based on the read two-dimensional code is displayed in a period other than the fluctuation, the relation with the effect executed on the main image display device 5 becomes difficult to understand. By terminating the display of information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation, the correspondence between the information related to the displayed game and the effect executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. In the present embodiment, the display of the information related to the game of the change ends at t133, but the display of the information related to the game displayed here is displayed as information about the past game, for example, in a period other than the change period. You may be made to do. Further, the mobile screen may include, for example, the number of times of change, the jackpot history, the game history of the number of acquired balls, and the like in addition to the information related to the changed game.
This is the end of the description of the correspondence between the variable display rendering mode and the display on the mobile terminal based on the reading timing of the two-dimensional code displayed during the execution of the variable display using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the relationship between a plurality of effect modes performed by the main image display device during execution of variable display and information related to the game displayed on the mobile terminal will be described. FIG. 35 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a plurality of effect modes performed by the main image display device during execution of variable display and information relating to a game displayed on the mobile terminal.

In FIG. 35 (a), the main image display device 5 executes the effects of variable display execution to jackpot start processing in the time series of t201 to t206.
When the main image display device 5 starts variable display at t201, the main image display device 5 starts changing the decorative design. Next, at t202, execution of the notice B is started. Next, at t203, the effect of reach B is started. Next, at t204, the decorative symbol is stopped with a big hit. Next, at t205, execution of the fanfare effect is started. Furthermore, the execution of the effect during the round starts from t206. That is, at t201 to t206, execution of variable display and an effect based on the big hit start process before the round are executed.

  In FIG. 35B, the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code Bn at a time t211 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the notice B is started in the main image display device 5. Here, the two-dimensional code Bn (B1 to B4) indicates a two-dimensional code including information for displaying the effect modes shown in FIGS. 35 (c) to (f) on the mobile screen. Note that one of the two-dimensional codes B1 to B4 illustrated in FIG. 35 may be selectively displayed. Selection of the two-dimensional code to be displayed can be executed by the process of step S533 in FIG.

  The sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code Bn during the period from t202 to t203 in which the main image display device 5 is producing the notice B. In the present embodiment, the display start of information related to a game in which the start timings of a plurality of effect modes executed by the main image display device 5 described in FIGS. 35C to 35F are displayed on the mobile screen. 35C to 35F, a case where the two-dimensional code is read at the shortest timing (t211) after the two-dimensional code is displayed will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, the timing t212 at which the display of the two-dimensional code Bn is erased is arbitrary.

FIG. 35C illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code B1 is displayed in FIG. The two-dimensional code B1 is information for executing an aspect in which the display timing of information regarding all games displayed on the mobile screen is after the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. Is included.
In FIG. 35 (c), when the two-dimensional code B1 is read at t211, the portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code B1 on the portable screen based on the information included in the two-dimensional code B1. Display (notification) of information related to the game is executed. In addition, as for the display of the information regarding a game, as above-mentioned, the kind of alerting | reporting information and the alerting | reporting timing of each alerting | reporting information are determined based on the information contained in the two-dimensional code B1.

The portable terminal displays the notice B as information regarding the game on the portable screen at t221 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. The notice B displayed on the mobile screen is displayed after the effect of the notice B on the main image display device 5 is started.
Next, at t222, the portable terminal displays information regarding the notice B and reach B games on the portable screen. In addition to displaying the notice B, the portable terminal displays reach B at t222, which is a timing after t203 when reach B is executed in the main image display device 5. The timing of t222 when the reach B is displayed is determined by a predetermined delay time set in advance based on information included in the two-dimensional code A as described above. That is, t222 is a time when a predetermined time elapses after the two-dimensional code is read.
The portable terminal displays a big hit as information about the game on the portable screen at t223 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. The jackpot display displayed on the mobile screen is performed after the decorative symbol of the main image display device 5 stops at the jackpot decorative symbol at t204.
In FIG. 35A, the display timing of the information related to the reach B and the jackpot game on the mobile screen based on the two-dimensional code B1 is as follows. After the start timing. Therefore, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

FIG. 35D illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code B2 is displayed in FIG. The two-dimensional code B2 is described with reference to FIG. 35 (c), in which the display timing of information regarding all games displayed on the mobile screen is after the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. It includes information for executing one aspect different from the aspect described above.
In FIG. 35D, when the two-dimensional code B2 is read at t211, the portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code B2 on the portable screen based on the information included in the two-dimensional code B2. Display (notification) of information related to the game is executed. The display of information related to the game is based on the information included in the two-dimensional code B2, and the type of notification information and the notification timing of each notification information are determined.

  The portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t231 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. Here, the standby display is an effect mode that is displayed when waiting for the timing to start displaying information about the game. The standby display may display an image such as an hourglass, for example.

  At t232, the portable terminal displays the notice B, the reach B, and information related to the big hit game. Similarly to t223, t232 is after the timing at which the effects of the notice B and the reach B are started to be executed in the main image display device 5. That is, the portable terminal displays a standby display, waits until all the effects in the main image display device 5 corresponding to the information related to the game to be displayed on the portable screen are started, and the effects in the main image display device 5 The information regarding the game to be displayed after all of the execution is started is displayed at a time. Accordingly, each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance by the portable terminal.

  FIG. 35 (e) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code B3 is displayed in FIG. 35 (b). The two-dimensional code B3 is the information regarding the game displayed on the mobile screen, and the jackpot display timing is later than the timing when the jackpot effect executed on the main image display device 5 is started. This display timing indicates a case where the reach of the reach B executed by the main image display device 5 is preceded by the start of execution.

  The portable terminal displays notice B and reach B as information about the game on the portable screen at t241 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. The effect of reach B on the main image display device 5 has not started to be executed at the time t241, and the player can execute the effect of reach B from the display of reach B displayed on the mobile screen. It will be notified before the production starts.

The portable terminal displays a jackpot as information regarding the game on the portable screen at t242 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. The jackpot display displayed on the mobile screen is performed after the decorative symbol of the main image display device 5 stops at the jackpot decorative symbol at t204.
In FIG. 35 (e), the display timing of information related to the game of reach B on the mobile screen based on the two-dimensional code B3 is earlier than the timing at which the effect of reach B executed on the main image display device 5 is started. On the other hand, the timing of displaying information related to the big hit game is later than the timing at which the big hit effect executed on the main image display device 5 is started. Therefore, the reach effect that is an effect on the way to the big hit executed by the main image display device 5 does not affect the interest much even if it is notified in advance. Since the big hit effect is not informed to the player in advance through the mobile screen, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  FIG. 35 (f) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code B4 is displayed in FIG. 35 (b). The two-dimensional code B4 indicates a case in which the display timing of all the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen is before the timing at which the big hit effect executed on the main image display device 5 is started.

  The portable terminal displays all information related to the game on the portable screen at t251 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t211 when the two-dimensional code is read. That is, in the portable terminal, the display timing of all the information related to the game on the portable screen based on the two-dimensional code B3 is before the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is started. The effect executed in the main image display device 5 is notified in advance from the mobile screen.

  In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 35 (f), as described above, the effect to be executed in the main image display device 5 is notified in advance via the mobile screen. However, for example, when the effect such as the notice B executed on the main image display device 5 is highly expected to become a big hit, the big hit is displayed in advance by displaying the two-dimensional code B4 to improve the interest. It may be possible to plan. Moreover, as shown in the two-dimensional codes B1 to B4, by displaying the two-dimensional code for informing the information about the game at various timings, it is possible to improve the interest by displaying the information about the game on the mobile screen. Become.

In FIG. 35, the display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a display of a loss is displayed as information related to a game on the mobile screen.
Moreover, although the case where any one of B1-B4 shown in FIG.35 (c)-(f) was displayed on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than B1-B4 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. In addition, one or more types of displays among B1 to B4 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
This is the end of the description of the relationship between the plurality of presentation modes performed by the main image display device during execution of variable display using FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, information relating to the presentation mode performed by the main image display device and the game displayed on the mobile terminal when the two-dimensional code is displayed a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display variations. Will be described.
First, with reference to FIG. 36, the relationship between the rendering mode performed by the main image display device when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display variation in the pseudo-continuous rendering and the information about the game displayed on the mobile terminal. Will be explained. FIG. 36 is a timing chart when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display change.

In FIG. 36 (a), the main image display device 5 executes the effects of variable display execution to jackpot start processing in the time series of t301 to t310.
When the main image display device 5 starts variable display at t301, the main image display device 5 starts changing the decorative design. Next, the effect of the notice C1 is started at t302, and the effect of the notice C1 is ended at t303. Next, at t304, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a pseudo-continuous effect by a pseudo-series C is executed as a type of pseudo-series and a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is performed. There are a plurality of rendering modes in the pseudo-rendition, and the rendering of the pseudo-series C is one mode among them. As described above, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is a display in which the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed is “0” is stopped and displayed, for example, with slight shaking or expansion or contraction, or a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). ) For a shorter period of time, and a stop display without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.
Next, at t305, pseudo continuous fluctuation is started. Next, the effect of the notice C2 is started at t306, and the effect of the notice C2 is ended at t307. In the present embodiment, the notice C1 and the notice C2 are described with different signs as different effects. However, the same effects may be used. Next, the effect of reach C is started at t307. Next, at t308, the jackpot decorative design is stopped, and at t309, a fanfare effect is started. Furthermore, the production during the round starts at t310.

In FIG. 36B, the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code C1n at a time t311 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect of the notice C1 in the main image display device 5. Here, the two-dimensional code C1n (C11 to C14) indicates a two-dimensional code including information for displaying the effect modes shown in FIGS. 36 (c) to (f) on the mobile screen. Note that any of the two-dimensional codes C11 to C14 illustrated in FIG. 36 may be selectively displayed. Selection of the two-dimensional code to be displayed can be executed by the process of step S533 in FIG.
The sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code Cn during the period from t302 to t303 in which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of the notice C1. In the present embodiment, a case where the two-dimensional code is read at the shortest timing (t311) after the two-dimensional code is displayed will be described as in the description of FIG.

The sub-image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code C2n at a time t313 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the notice C2 is started to be executed in the main image display device 5. Here, the two-dimensional code C2n (C21 to C23) indicates a two-dimensional code including information for displaying the effect modes shown in FIGS. 36 (g) to (i) on the mobile screen. Note that any of the two-dimensional codes C21 to C23 illustrated in FIG. 36 may be selectively displayed. Selection of the two-dimensional code to be displayed can be executed by the process of step S533 in FIG.
The sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code C2n during the period from t306 to t307 in which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of the notice C2. In the present embodiment, a case where the two-dimensional code is read at the shortest timing (t313) after the two-dimensional code is displayed will be described as in the description of FIG.

FIG. 36 (c) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code C11 is displayed in FIG. 35 (b). The two-dimensional code C11 is information for executing one aspect in which the display timing of information regarding all games displayed on the mobile screen is after the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. Is included.
In FIG. 36C, the mobile terminal reads the two-dimensional code C11 at t311. The portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code C11, and executes display (notification) of information related to the game on the portable screen based on the information included in the two-dimensional code C11. In addition, as for the display of the information regarding a game, as above-mentioned, the kind of alerting | reporting information and the alerting | reporting timing of each alerting | reporting information are determined based on the information contained in the two-dimensional code C11.

The portable terminal displays a notice C1 as information about the game on the portable screen at t321 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t311 after reading the two-dimensional code. The display of the notice C1 displayed on the mobile screen is performed after the effect of the notice C1 on the main image display device 5 is started.
Next, at t322, which is a timing after t304, the mobile terminal displays information related to the game of the pseudo-ream C on the mobile screen in addition to displaying the notice C1. t304 is a timing at which the effect of the pseudo ream C for temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols on the main image display device 5 is started. The timing of t322 when the pseudo ream C is displayed on the mobile screen is determined in advance based on information included in the two-dimensional code C11 as described above, and when a predetermined time elapses after the two-dimensional code is read. It is.
The portable terminal displays reach C as information about the game on the portable screen at t323 when a predetermined time has elapsed from t311 when the two-dimensional code is read. The reach C displayed on the mobile screen is displayed after the main image display device 5 starts the reach C effect at t307. Furthermore, the portable terminal displays a big hit as information related to the game on the portable screen at t3254 when a predetermined time has elapsed from t311 when the two-dimensional code is read. The jackpot display displayed on the mobile screen is performed after the main image display device 5 stops the jackpot decorative design at t305.
In FIG. 36 (c), the pseudo-ream C, reach C, and jackpot display timing displayed on the mobile screen based on the two-dimensional code C1 are the respective effects executed by the main image display device 5 as described above. It will be after the timing of starting. Therefore, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

  FIG. 36 (d) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code C12 is displayed in FIG. 36 (b). In the two-dimensional code C12, as in the two-dimensional code C11, the display timing of information related to all games displayed on the mobile screen is later than the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. The two-dimensional code C12 includes information for performing the standby display described with reference to FIG. 35D and causing the mobile screen to wait for display of information regarding the game. Based on the two-dimensional code C12, the portable terminal displays a standby display instead of displaying the notice C1 from t321 to t322 in FIG.

The portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t331 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t311 after reading the two-dimensional code.
At t332, the mobile terminal displays information related to the game of the notice C1 and the pseudo-ream C. Similarly to t322, t332 is after the timing when the execution of the pseudo-series C is started in the main image display device 5.
At t333, the portable terminal displays information related to the game of the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, and the reach C. Similarly to t323, t333 is after the timing at which the effect of reach C is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Further, at t334, the portable terminal displays the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, the reach C, and information on the big hit game. Similar to t324, t334 is after the timing at which execution of the big hit effect is started in the main image display device 5.
In FIG. 36 (d), as in FIG. 36 (c), each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

  FIG. 36 (e) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code C13 is displayed in FIG. 36 (b). In the two-dimensional code C13, as in the two-dimensional code C11, the display timing of information regarding all games displayed on the mobile screen is later than the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. The two-dimensional code C13 includes information for performing the standby display described with reference to FIG. 35D and causing the mobile screen to wait for display of information relating to the game. Based on the two-dimensional code C13, the portable terminal displays a standby display instead of displaying the notice C1 and the pseudo-ream C at t321 to t323 in FIG.

The portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t341 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t311 after reading the two-dimensional code.
At t342, the portable terminal displays information related to the game of the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, and the reach C. Similar to t323, t342 is after the timing when the effect of reach C is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
At t343, the mobile terminal displays information on the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, the reach C, and the jackpot game. Similar to t324, t343 is after the timing at which execution of the big hit effect is started in the main image display device 5.
In FIG. 36 (e) as well, similarly to FIG. 36 (c), each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

  FIG. 36 (f) illustrates a case where the two-dimensional code C14 is displayed in FIG. 36 (b). In the two-dimensional code C14, as in the two-dimensional code C11, the display timing of information related to all games displayed on the mobile screen is later than the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. The two-dimensional code C14 includes information for performing the standby display described with reference to FIG. 35D and causing the mobile screen to wait for display of information relating to the game. Based on the two-dimensional code C14, the portable terminal displays a standby display instead of displaying the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, and the reach C at t321 to t324 in FIG.

The portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t351 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t311 after reading the two-dimensional code.
At t352, the portable terminal displays the notice C1, the pseudo-ream C, the reach C, and information related to the jackpot game. Similarly to t324, t352 is after the timing at which execution of the big hit effect is started in the main image display device 5.
In FIG. 36 (f) as well, similarly to FIG. 36 (c), each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

36 (g) to (i), when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice in the same variation, the two-dimensional code displayed for the second time is read by the portable terminal, and information regarding the game is displayed on the portable screen. The case of displaying is shown. 36 (g) to 36 (f) is a display period of standby display.
36 (g) to (i) illustrate a case where the two-dimensional code C2n (C21 to C23) is displayed in the period from t313 to t314 in FIG. 36 (b). The two-dimensional code C21 is similar to the two-dimensional code C11 in that the display timing of information about all games displayed on the mobile screen is later than the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. Includes information for controlling the portable terminal. The two-dimensional codes C22 and C23 include information for performing standby display and causing the mobile screen to wait for display of information relating to the game.

In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code C1n and the two-dimensional code C2n are described as executing different rendering modes. However, the two-dimensional code C1n may be displayed twice. In this case, C1n displayed first and C1n displayed second time may be the same two-dimensional code (for example, C11 is displayed twice) or different two-dimensional codes (for example, 1 C11 is displayed the second time and C12 is displayed the second time). Since the display of the mobile screen when displaying the two-dimensional code C1n for the second time is the same as the display of FIGS. 11C to 11F when the two-dimensional code C1n is displayed for the first time, the description is omitted. To do.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code C2n includes information for displaying information related to a game about an effect executed in the main image display device 5 after the two-dimensional code C2n is displayed on the mobile screen. . However, for example, in the two-dimensional code C2n, information related to the game about the effect executed in the main image display device 5 before the two-dimensional code C2n is displayed may be displayed on the mobile screen.

In FIG. 36 (g), the portable terminal displays information regarding the game of the notice C2 at t361 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t313 when the two-dimensional code is read. t361 is after the timing at which the effect of the notice C2 starts to be executed in the main image display device 5.
At t362, the portable terminal displays information related to the notice C2 and the game of reach C. t362 is after the timing when the effect of reach C is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
At t363, the portable terminal displays the notice C2, the reach C, and information related to the big hit game. t363 is after the timing at which the effect of the big hit is started in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 36 (g), each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 36 (h), the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t371 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t313 when the two-dimensional code is read.
At t372, the portable terminal displays information relating to the notice C2 and the game of reach C. Similarly to t362, t372 is after the timing at which the effect of reach C is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
At t373, the mobile terminal displays the notice C2, the reach C, and information related to the big hit game. Similar to t363, t373 is after the timing at which execution of the big hit effect is started in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 36 (h), each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 36 (i), the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t381 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t313 when the two-dimensional code is read.
At t382, the mobile terminal displays the notice C2 and the reach C, and information related to the jackpot game. Similar to t363, t382 is after the timing at which execution of the big hit effect is started in the main image display device 5.
In FIG. 36 (i), each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 36, the display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a display of a loss is displayed as information related to a game on the mobile screen.
Moreover, although the case where any one of C11-C23 shown in FIG.36 (c)-(i) was demonstrated on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than C11-C23 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. In addition, one or more types of display among C11 to C23 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
With the above, with the pseudo-continuous effect, the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display change and the information about the game displayed on the mobile terminal End the description of the relationship.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display change in the pseudo continuous effect, the main image display device performs the display of the portable terminal within the variable display change. A relationship between the aspect and information about the game displayed on the mobile terminal will be described. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing that when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display change, the display of the portable terminal is terminated within the variable display change.

In FIG. 37 (a), the main image display device 5 executes the effects of variable display execution to jackpot start processing in the time series of t401 to t410.
When the main image display device 5 starts variable display at t401, the main image display device 5 starts changing the decorative design. Next, the effect of the notice D1 is started at t402, and the effect of the notice D1 is ended at t403. Next, at t404, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a pseudo-continuous effect by the pseudo-ream D is executed and a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol is performed.
Next, at t405, pseudo continuous fluctuation is started. Next, the effect of the notice D2 is started at t406, and the effect of the notice D2 is ended at t407. The notice D1 and the notice D2 are described with different signs in the present embodiment as different effects, but may be the same effects. Next, at D407, reach D is started. Next, at t408, the big hit decorative pattern is stopped, and the fanfare effect is started at t409. Furthermore, the production during the round starts at t410.

In FIG. 37 (b), the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code D1n at a time t411 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the notice D1 is started in the main image display device 5. As the two-dimensional codes D11 to D13 illustrated in FIG. 37, any two-dimensional code may be selectively displayed. Selection of the two-dimensional code to be displayed can be executed by the process of step S533 in FIG.
The sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code Dn during a period from t402 to t403 in which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of the notice D1.

The sub-image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code D2n at t413 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect of the notice D2 is started to be executed in the main image display device 5. Here, the two-dimensional code D2n (D21 to D23) indicates a two-dimensional code including information for displaying the effect modes shown in FIGS. 37 (c) to (e) on the mobile screen. Note that any of the two-dimensional codes D21 to D23 illustrated in FIG. 37 may be selectively displayed. Selection of the two-dimensional code to be displayed can be executed by the process of step S533 in FIG.
The sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code D2n during the period from t406 to t407 in which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of the notice D2. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the two-dimensional code is read at the longest timing (t414) after the two-dimensional code is displayed, as in the description of FIG.

  FIGS. 37 (c) to 37 (e) show the game-related information on the portable screen by reading the two-dimensional code displayed for the second time on the portable terminal when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice in the same variation. The case of displaying is shown. The difference between FIGS. 37C to 37E is the display period of the standby display. The two-dimensional code D21 is information for controlling the portable terminal so that the display timing of information related to all games displayed on the portable screen is after the timing at which each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is executed. including. The two-dimensional codes D22 and C23 include information for performing standby display and causing the mobile screen to wait for display of information relating to the game.

In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code D1n and the two-dimensional code D2n are described as executing different rendering modes. However, the two-dimensional code D1n may be displayed twice. In that case, the first displayed D1n and the second displayed D1n may be the same two-dimensional code (for example, D11 is displayed twice) or may be different two-dimensional codes (for example, 1 D11 is displayed the second time and D12 is displayed the second time).
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code D2n includes information for displaying, on the mobile screen, information related to a game regarding an effect executed in the main image display device 5 after the two-dimensional code D2n is displayed. . However, for example, in the two-dimensional code D2n, information related to the game about the effect executed in the main image display device 5 before the two-dimensional code D2n is displayed may be displayed on the mobile screen.

In FIG. 37 (c), the portable terminal displays information regarding the game of the notice D2 at t421 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t414 when the two-dimensional code is read. t421 is after the timing at which the effect of the notice D2 is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Furthermore, t421 is before the timing at which the effect that the decorative symbol stops in the big hit in the main image display device 5 is started. That is, even when a plurality of two-dimensional codes are displayed within one variation, the display of the information related to the game of the notice D2 is ended while the variable display is being executed (before the decorative symbols are stopped). Therefore, by terminating the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation, the correspondence between the information related to the displayed game and the effect executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. In FIG. 37 (c), the information on the reach D and the jackpot game described below does not end the display of the information on the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation. FIG. 37C illustrates a case where a part of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen (notice D2) ends the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation.

The portable terminal displays information regarding the notice D2 and the reach D game at t422. t422 is after the timing when the effect of reach D is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
At t423, the portable terminal displays the notice D2, the reach D, and information related to the jackpot game. t423 is after the timing at which the big hit effect starts to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 37 (c), each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 37 (d), the portable terminal displays information regarding the notice D2 and the reach D game at t431 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t414 when the two-dimensional code is read. t431 is after the timing at which the effect of reach D is started to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Furthermore, t432 is before the timing at which the effect that the decorative design stops at the big hit in the main image display device 5 is started. That is, even when a plurality of two-dimensional codes are displayed within one variation, the display of information regarding the notice D2 and the game of reach D is ended during the execution of variable display (before the decorative symbols are stopped). Therefore, by terminating the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation, the correspondence between the information related to the displayed game and the effect executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. In FIG. 37 (d), the information on the jackpot game described below does not end the display of the information on the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation. FIG. 37 (d) illustrates a case where a part of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen (notice D2 and reach D) ends the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation.

At t432, the portable terminal displays information regarding the notice D2, the reach D, and the jackpot game. t432 is after the timing at which the big hit effect starts to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 37 (d), each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 37 (e), the portable terminal displays the notice D2, the reach D, and information on the big hit game at t441 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t414 when the two-dimensional code is read. t441 is after the timing at which the big hit effect starts to be executed in the main image display device 5.
Furthermore, t441 is before the timing at which the effect that the decorative design stops at the big hit in the main image display device 5 is started. That is, even when a plurality of two-dimensional codes are displayed within one variation, the display of the notice D2, the reach D, and the information regarding the big hit game is ended during execution of variable display (before the decorative symbol is stopped). Therefore, by terminating the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation, the correspondence between the information related to the displayed game and the effect executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. FIG. 37 (e) exemplifies a case where the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen (notice D2, reach D, and jackpot) ends the display of the information related to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the variation.
Also in FIG. 37 (e), each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 37, the display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a display of a loss is displayed as information related to a game on the mobile screen.
Moreover, although the case where any one of D21-D23 shown in FIG.37 (c)-(e) was displayed on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than D21-D23 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. In addition, one or more types of display among D21 to D23 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
As described above, when the two-dimensional code is displayed twice during the variable display change in the pseudo continuous effect using FIG. 37, the effect performed by the main image display device that terminates the display of the mobile terminal within the variable display change. The description of the relationship between the aspect and the information related to the game displayed on the mobile terminal ends.

In FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, an example in which a two-dimensional code is displayed in a pseudo-continuous variation of a pseudo-continuous effect has been described as a case where a two-dimensional code is displayed a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display variations. However, the present invention is not limited to this when the two-dimensional code is displayed a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display variations.
For example, when displaying the two-dimensional code corresponding to the target hold information in the pre-reading notice effect, the two-dimensional code corresponding to the target hold information is displayed during digestion of the hold information before the target hold information. In addition, a two-dimensional code corresponding to the target hold information may be displayed again during digestion of the target hold information. When the target hold information includes a jackpot, the main image display device 5 performs an effect indicating the jackpot during digestion of the hold information before the target, displays a two-dimensional code, and reads the two-dimensional code. Information on the big hit game may be displayed on the mobile screen. At that time, the main image display device 5 executes the processing by using the relationship between the effect mode performed by the main image display device 5 described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37 and the information about the game displayed on the mobile terminal as it is. It is possible to prevent the player from being notified of the jackpot in advance via the mobile screen before the jackpot effect is executed. For example, when two pieces of hold information are digested before the target hold information, the variable display time of the hold information to be digested first is 10 seconds at maximum, and the variable information of the hold information to be digested second is variable. When the variation time is a maximum of 15 seconds, and the variable display variation time of the hold information of the target to be digested third is a maximum of 50 seconds, until the player is notified of the jackpot effect based on the hold information of the target Takes up to 75 seconds. Therefore, if the jackpot information is displayed on the portable screen with a delay time of 75 seconds or more after the two-dimensional code is displayed, the player is not notified of the jackpot in advance. Even if the number of holdings is equal to or greater than the predetermined number and the variation time of the variable display of the holding information digested first or second is shortened, the big hit effect performed in the main image display device 5 is achieved. Since it starts early, even if the variation time is shortened, it does not affect whether or not the player is informed of the jackpot in advance.

  Next, using FIG. 38, when a two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit, it is displayed on the mobile terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during the fanfare effect. Explain the relationship with information related to the game. FIG. 38 is a timing chart when the promotion effect is performed during the fanfare effect when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit.

  In FIG. 38 (a), the main image display device 5 performs the effects of the variable display end to jackpot start process in the time series of t501 to t504. The main image display device 5 stops the decorative symbol at the jackpot symbol at t501. Next, at t502, a fanfare effect is started. Next, at t503, the effect of promotion A is started. Next, at t504, the promotion A effect is ended, the fanfare effect is ended, and the round effect is started.

  In FIG. 38B, the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code F at t511 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect of stopping the decorative design in the main image display device 5. The sub image display device 50 is assumed to display the two-dimensional code F in the period from t511 to t512 in the period from t502 to t504 in which the main image display device 5 executes the fanfare effect. That is, the player can read the two-dimensional code F displayed during the period from t511 to t512 with the portable terminal. FIGS. 38C to 38D to be described next show the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code F is read at the shortest timing (≈t511) when the two-dimensional code F is displayed. FIGS. 38E to 38F show the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code F is read at the longest timing (≈t512) when the two-dimensional code F is displayed. In this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, FIGS. 38C to 38D read the two-dimensional code at t511, and FIGS. 38E to 38F read the two-dimensional code at t512. It will be explained as a thing.

  When the two-dimensional code F is read at t511, the portable terminal processes the read two-dimensional code F by the portable terminal, and displays (notifies) information related to the game on the portable screen based on the information included in the two-dimensional code. Execute.

In FIG.38 (c), a portable terminal displays a jackpot as information regarding a game on the portable screen at t521 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t511 when the two-dimensional code is read. The portable terminal displays a big hit at t521, which is a timing after t501 when the big hit effect is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t522, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion A game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion A at t522, which is a timing after t503 when the promotion A is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t523, the portable terminal hits the portable screen and displays information related to the promotion A and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t522, which is a timing after t504 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5. The confirmation of the promotion result means that the main image display device 5 is notified of whether or not to promote.
Also in FIG. 38C, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 38 (d), the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t531 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t511 when the two-dimensional code is read.
At t532, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion A game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion A at t532, which is a timing after t503 when the promotion A is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t533, the portable terminal hits the portable screen and displays information about the promotion A and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t532, which is a timing after t504 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 38D, each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG.38 (e), a portable terminal displays jackpot as information regarding a game on a portable screen in t541 when predetermined processing time passed from t512 which read the two-dimensional code.
At t542, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion A game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion A at t542, which is a timing after t503 when the promotion A is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t543, the mobile terminal hits the mobile screen and displays information related to the promotion A and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t543, which is a timing after t504 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
At t544, the portable terminal ends the display of the information regarding the game of the jackpot, promotion A and promotion result displayed on the portable screen. At t544, which is the timing before the time t505 when the effect of round 1 ends on the main image display device 5. End the display of information about the game.
By terminating the display of information relating to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the round 1, the correspondence between the information relating to the displayed game and the effects executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood.

In FIG. 38F, the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t551 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t512 when the two-dimensional code is read. At t552, the portable terminal displays information on the big hit and promotion A game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the jackpot and promotion A at t552, which is a timing after t503 when promotion A is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t553, the portable terminal hits the portable screen and displays information related to the promotion A and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t553, which is a timing after t504 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
At t554, the portable terminal ends the display of the information regarding the game of the jackpot, promotion A and promotion result displayed on the portable screen. At t554, which is a timing before t505 when the effect of round 1 ends in the main image display device 5. End the display of information about the game.
By terminating the display of information relating to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the round 1, the correspondence between the information relating to the displayed game and the effects executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. Ending within round 1 includes ending within a period in which round 1 in a normally assumed game is consumed. For example, when the round 1 digestion period is 15 seconds, it ends within 15 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the display of information about the game ends at t524, t534, t544, or t554, but the display of the information about the game displayed here is, for example, as information about the past game in another period. It may be displayed. Further, the mobile screen may include, for example, the number of fluctuations, the jackpot history, the game history of the number of acquired balls, etc. in addition to the information related to the game.

In FIG. 38, the display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a loss is displayed on the mobile screen as information related to the game.
Moreover, although the case where any one of E1-E4 shown in FIG.38 (c)-(f) was displayed on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than E1-E4 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. Further, one or more types of displays among E1 to E4 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
As described above, when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit using FIG. 38, it is displayed on the mobile terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during the fanfare effect. The explanation of the relationship with the information relating to the game to be completed ends.

  Next, using FIG. 39, when a two-dimensional code is displayed in a fanfare effect after a big hit, it is displayed on the mobile terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during round 1. Explain the relationship with information related to the game. FIG. 39 is a timing chart when the promotion effect is performed during round 1 when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit.

  In FIG. 39A, the main image display device 5 performs the effects of the variable display end to jackpot start process in the time series from t601 to t606. The main image display device 5 stops the decorative symbol at the big hit symbol at t601. Next, at t602, a fanfare effect is started. Next, at t603, the fanfare effect is ended and the effect of round 1 is started. Next, at t604, the effect of promotion B is started, and at t605, the effect of promotion A is ended. Further, the effect of round 1 is finished at t606.

  In FIG. 39 (b), the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code G at t611 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect of stopping the decorative design in the main image display device 5. The sub-image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code G in the period from t611 to t612 in the period from t602 to t503 in which the main image display device 5 is executing the fanfare effect. That is, the player can read the two-dimensional code G displayed in the period from t611 to t612 with the portable terminal. FIGS. 39C to 39D to be described next show the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code G is read at the shortest timing (≈t611) when the two-dimensional code G is displayed. 39 (e) to 39 (f) show the display on the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code G is read at the longest timing (≈t612) when the two-dimensional code G is displayed. In the present embodiment, in order to simplify the description, FIGS. 39C to 39D read the two-dimensional code at t611, and FIGS. 39E to 39F read the two-dimensional code at t612. It will be explained as a thing.

In FIG. 39 (c), the portable terminal displays a big hit as information regarding the game on the portable screen at t621 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t611 when the two-dimensional code is read. The portable terminal displays a big hit at t621, which is a timing after t601 when the big hit effect is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t <b> 622, the portable terminal displays information related to the jackpot and promotion B game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion B at t622, which is a timing after t604 when the promotion B is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t623, the mobile terminal hits the mobile screen and displays information related to the promotion B and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t623, which is a timing after t605 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 39 (c), each effect executed on the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 39D, the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t631 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t611 when the two-dimensional code is read.
At t632, the portable terminal displays information related to the jackpot and promotion B game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion B at t632, which is a timing after t604 when the promotion B is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t633, the portable terminal hits the portable screen and displays information related to the promotion B and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t633, which is a timing after t605 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
Also in FIG. 39D, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 39 (e), the portable terminal displays a big hit as information relating to the game on the portable screen at t641 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t612 when the two-dimensional code is read.
At t642, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion B game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the promotion B at t642, which is a timing after t604 when the promotion B is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t643, the portable terminal hits the portable screen and displays information related to the promotion B and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t643, which is a timing after t605 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
At t644, the portable terminal ends the display of information regarding the jackpot, promotion B, and promotion result game displayed on the portable screen. At t644, which is the timing before the time t606 when the effect of the round 1 ends on the main image display device 5. End the display of information about the game.
By terminating the display of information relating to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the round 1, the correspondence between the information relating to the displayed game and the effects executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood. Ending within round 1 includes ending within a period in which round 1 in a normally assumed game is consumed. For example, when the round 1 digestion period is 15 seconds, it ends within 15 seconds.

In FIG. 39 (f), the portable terminal displays a standby display on the portable screen at t651 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t512 when the two-dimensional code is read. At t652, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion B game on the portable screen. The portable terminal displays the jackpot and promotion B at t652, which is a timing after t604 when promotion B is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t653, the mobile terminal hits the mobile screen and displays information related to the promotion B and the game of the promotion result. The portable terminal displays the promotion result at t653, which is a timing after t605 when the promotion result is confirmed in the main image display device 5.
At t654, the portable terminal ends the display of the information regarding the game of the jackpot, promotion B and promotion result displayed on the portable screen. At t654, which is the timing before the time t606 when the effect of round 1 ends on the main image display device 5, the portable terminal. End the display of information about the game.
By terminating the display of information relating to the game displayed on the mobile screen within the round 1, the correspondence between the information relating to the displayed game and the effects executed on the main image display device 5 can be easily understood.

In this embodiment, the case where the effect of promotion B is executed during the effect of round 1 is illustrated, but the length of the effect during the round depends on the winning situation of the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 7. Change. For example, when the number of winning game balls in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed from the open state to the closed state is determined, when the game ball reaches the winning number in a short time, the length of the round is shortened. When the number of game balls does not reach the winning number, the round length is the set longest time (for example, 29 seconds). In this embodiment, in order to secure the stage time of promotion B during the round, for example, in round 1, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state in a short time, and the promotion B The effect may be executed in round 1.
Further, in this embodiment, the display of information about the game ends at t624, t634, t644, or t654, but the display of the information about the game displayed here is, for example, as information about the past game in another period. It may be displayed. Further, the mobile screen may include, for example, the number of fluctuations, the jackpot history, the game history of the number of acquired balls, etc. in addition to the information related to the game.

In FIG. 39, the display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a loss is displayed as information related to a game on the mobile screen.
Moreover, although the case where any one of F1-F4 shown in FIG.39 (c)-(f) was displayed on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than F1-F4 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. Further, one or more types of displays among F1 to F4 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
As described above, when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit using FIG. 39, it is displayed on the portable terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during the round 1. The explanation of the relationship with the information relating to the game to be completed ends.

  Next, using FIG. 40, when a two-dimensional code is displayed in a fanfare effect after a big hit, it is displayed on the mobile terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during round 4. Explain the relationship with information related to the game. FIG. 40 is a timing chart when the promotion effect is performed during the round 4 when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit.

  In FIG. 40A, the main image display device 5 performs the effect of the process from the end of variable display to the middle of the round (up to round 4) in the time series of t701 to t709. The main image display device 5 stops the decorative symbol at the jackpot symbol at t701. Next, at t702, a fanfare effect is started. Next, at t703, the fanfare effect is ended and the effect of round 1 is started. Next, at t704, the effect of round 2 is started. Next, at t705, the effect of round 3 is started. At t706, the production of round 4 is started. Next, the promotion C effect starts at t707, and the promotion C effect ends at t708. Next, at t709, the effect of round 4 is finished and the effect of round 5 is started.

  In FIG. 40B, the sub image display device 50 starts displaying the two-dimensional code G at t711 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the effect of stopping the decorative design in the main image display device 5. The sub image display device 50 is assumed to display the two-dimensional code G in the period from t707 to t708 during the period from t706 to t709 in which the main image display device 5 executes the effect of round 1. That is, the player can read the two-dimensional code G displayed during the period from t711 to t712 with the portable terminal. FIGS. 40C to 40D to be described next show the display of the mobile screen when the two-dimensional code G is read at the shortest timing (≈t711) when the two-dimensional code G is displayed. In the embodiment, in order to simplify the description, FIGS. 40C to 40D are described assuming that a two-dimensional code is read at t711.

In FIG. 40 (c), the portable terminal displays a big hit as information regarding the game on the portable screen at t721 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t711 when the two-dimensional code is read. The portable terminal displays the big hit at t721, which is a timing after t701 when the big hit effect is executed in the main image display device 5.
At t722, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion C game on the portable screen.
Here, in order to set t722 as a timing after t707 when the promotion C is executed in the main image display device 5, t707 is a time when at least round 1 to round 3 are longest, and t706 is a time between t706 and t707 in round 4. The timing needs to be after the total time. For example, if the longest time of one round is 29 seconds and t706 to t707 are 5 seconds, t721 to t722 need at least 29 × 3 + 5 = 92 seconds. In this embodiment, t721 to t722 are set in advance to be 92 seconds or longer.
Also in FIG. 40C, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In FIG. 40D, the mobile terminal displays a big hit as information related to the game on the mobile screen at t731 when a predetermined processing time has elapsed from t711 when the two-dimensional code is read. The portable terminal displays a big hit at t731, which is a timing after t701 when the main image display device 5 executes the big hit effect.
At t732, the portable terminal displays information relating to the jackpot and promotion C game on the portable screen.
Here, in order to set t732 as a timing after t707 when the promotion C is executed in the main image display device 5, as in t721 to t722, t731 to t732 is equal to or more than the longest time of three rounds + t706 to t707. Need to be.
Also in FIG. 40C, each effect executed by the main image display device 5 is not notified to the player in advance via the mobile screen.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the production of promotion c is performed during the production of round 4 is illustrated, in order to secure the production time of promotion C during round 4, as in FIG. For example, in round 4, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 may be controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state in a short time, and the promotion C effect may be executed in round 4.
Further, in this embodiment, the display of information about the game ends at t624, t634, t644, or t654, but the display of the information about the game displayed here is, for example, as information about the past game in another period. It may be displayed. Further, the mobile screen may include, for example, the number of fluctuations, the jackpot history, the game history of the number of acquired balls, etc. in addition to the information related to the game.

In FIG. 40, display of information related to a game in the case of a big hit has been described. However, in the case of a loss, a loss is displayed on the mobile screen as information related to the game.
Moreover, although the case where any one of G1-G2 shown in FIG.40 (c)-(d) was displayed on the portable screen was demonstrated, displays other than G1-G2 are displayed on a portable screen. You may do it. In addition, one or more types of displays among G1 and G2 may be selected and displayed on the mobile screen.
As described above, when the two-dimensional code is displayed in the fanfare effect after the big hit using FIG. 40, it is displayed on the portable terminal and the effect mode performed by the main image display device when the promotion effect is performed during the round 4. The explanation of the relationship with the information relating to the game to be completed ends.

  Next, the raising / lowering of the sub-image display device 50 and the display timing of the two-dimensional code will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the raising / lowering of the sub image display device and the display timing of the two-dimensional code.

  In FIG. 41A, it is assumed that the sub image display device 50 is stopped with the upper side of the main image display device 5 as the original position. The two-dimensional code is not displayed on the sub image display device 50. It is assumed that the main image display device 5 is executing variable display.

  In FIG. 41 (b), the sub image display device 50 starts to descend from the original position. It is assumed that a notice effect is displayed on the main image display device 5. The notice effect is one effect selected from a plurality of notice effects.

  In FIG. 41 (c), the main image display device 5 descends to the front of the main image display device 5 that is executing the notice effect, and the display screen of the main image display device 5 is hidden about half.

In FIG. 41 (d), the main image display device 5 stops at the lower end position. A two-dimensional code is displayed on the display screen of the main image display device 5 stopped at the lower end position. The main image display device 5 stops at a lower end position for a predetermined time and displays a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, when the sub image display device 50 stops at the lower end position, the display screen of the main image display device 5 is hidden by the sub image display device 50. Therefore, the sub-image display device 50 may display a two-dimensional code and display items displayed on the main image display device 5 such as a display of the number of reservations and a variation display of decorative symbols. That is, even when the display screen of the main image display device 5 is hidden by the sub image display device 50, it may be ensured that the player can always notify the number of holds, the display of the decorative symbols, and the like. At this time, items displayed on the main image display device 5 may be displayed on the sub-image display device 50 with small symbols or simple symbols. For example, when the sub image display device 50 moves, a display of the number of holds and a decorative symbol change display are displayed on a part of the sub image display device 50, and when the sub image display device 50 reaches the lower end position, A two-dimensional code may be displayed in addition to the display of the number of reservations and the display of the decorative pattern.

  In FIG. 41 (e), the sub image display device 50 starts to rise from the lower end position. The sub-image display device 50 ends the display of the two-dimensional code. That is, the sub-image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code only when it is at the lower end position, and does not display the two-dimensional code during ascending or descending. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily photograph the two-dimensional code displayed on the sub image display device 50 using the portable terminal.

  In FIG. 41 (f), the sub image display device 50 rises to the original position and stops. The main image display device 5 shows a case where a reach effect is being executed.

In the present embodiment, the case where the two-dimensional code is displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50 is illustrated only when the sub image display device 50 is stopped at the lower end position. You may make it display a two-dimensional code, when it exists near a position. Even if the sub-image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code in a short time near the lower end position, the reading of the two-dimensional code is not affected.
Further, the two-dimensional code may be displayed while the sub image display device 50 is moving. At that time, the display position of the two-dimensional code on the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 may be moved in accordance with the movement of the sub-image display device 50 so that the position of the two-dimensional code with respect to the player is not changed. . For example, the two-dimensional code displayed on the display screen of the sub image display device 50 is raised while the sub image display device 50 is lowered, while the display screen of the sub image display device 50 is raised while the sub image display device 50 is raised. The two-dimensional code displayed on the screen may be lowered. Accordingly, since the two-dimensional code does not move even when the sub image display device 50 is moving, the two-dimensional code can be easily read.
In the present embodiment, the case where the sub image display device 50 is raised and lowered once is illustrated, but the number of times the sub image display device 50 is raised and lowered is not limited to one. For example, the original position and the lower end position may be raised and lowered a plurality of times. When the sub image display device 50 moves up and down a plurality of times, the two-dimensional code may be displayed only when the sub image display device 50 is stopped at the lower end position.
Further, the sub image display device 50 may be moved up and down so as to rise once in the middle of lowering and then lower again. Further, the sub image display device 50 may be lowered using its own weight and raised by a motor or the like.
Further, when the sub image display device 50 is moved up and down, an effect mode in which a sound effect is output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 is turned on may be executed.
When the movement time of the sub image display device 50 is short with respect to the stationary period shown in FIG. 41 (d), the sub image display device 50 may display a two-dimensional code.
Above, description of the raising / lowering of the sub image display apparatus 50 and the display timing of a two-dimensional code using FIG. 41 is complete | finished.

  Next, a tilt operation when the sub image display device 50 is tilted without being lowered from the original position will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a tilt operation of the sub-image display device.

In FIG. 42A, the sub image display device 50 is assumed to be in the original position above the main image display device 5. It is assumed that the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 at the original position is substantially parallel to the display screen of the main image display device 5.
For example, if the height of the player's line of sight is the center of the display screen of the main image display device 5, the player views the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 in the original position from below at a predetermined viewing angle.
In FIG. 42B, the sub image display device 50 tilts the display screen forward by a predetermined angle. By tilting the sub-image display device 50, the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 is directed downward, so that the player can view the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 with a smaller viewing angle (more directly facing). You can see it. The sub image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code with the display screen tilted. Therefore, by displaying the two-dimensional code on the tilted sub-image display device 50, the player can easily read the two-dimensional code using the portable terminal.
When the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the sub image display device 50 returns the display screen from the tilt position to the original position again.

In the present embodiment, the case where the two-dimensional code is displayed while the sub image display device 50 is held at the tilt position has been described. For example, during the movement from the original position to the tilt position, or from the tilt position The two-dimensional code may be displayed during the movement to the original position.
In the present embodiment, the case where the tilt operation is performed only once has been described. However, for example, the sub image display device 50 may be reciprocated a plurality of times between the original position and the tilt position.
Moreover, although the case where the tilt angle is fixed has been described in the present embodiment, the tilt angle may be varied depending on the effect mode. Further, in accordance with the tilt operation of the sub image display device 50, for example, an effect using the main image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9 may be performed.
This is the end of the description of the tilting operation of the sub-image display device 50 using FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, a tilt operation when the sub-image display device moves up and down will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating the raising / lowering and tilting operations of the sub-image display device. FIG. 43 shows a case where the sub image display device 50 descends to a position where it overlaps the display screen of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 50 tilts forward. FIG. 44 shows a case where the sub image display device 50 descends to a position where it overlaps the display screen of the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 50 tilts backward. FIG. 43 shows a case where the sub image display device 50 descends to a position below the main image display device 5 and the sub image display device 50 tilts backward.

  In FIG. 43A, the sub image display device 50 is located above the main image display device 5 as the original position, and the display screen of the sub image display device 50 is substantially parallel to the display screen of the main image display device 5. It is assumed that it is in a state.

  In FIG. 43 (b), the sub image display device 50 starts to descend from the original position to the front surface of the main image display device 5. The sub image display device 50 may be lowered by its own weight or may be lowered by an actuator such as a motor. Further, during the descent, as described with reference to FIG. 41, the raising and lowering may be repeated a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the sub image display device 50 descends to the lower end position and stops. In the present embodiment, the lower end position of the sub image display device 50 is a position that overlaps the display screen of the main image display device 5 and covers the entire display screen of the main image display device 5. However, the lower end position may be another position that partially hides the display screen of the main image display device 5, for example.

  In FIG. 43D, the sub image display device 50 tilts forward to the tilt position. The sub image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code at the tilt position. By displaying the two-dimensional code at the tilt position, the player can easily read the two-dimensional code.

44 (a) to 44 (c) are the same as FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c) and will not be described.
In FIG. 44D, the sub image display device 50 tilts backward to the tilt position. The sub image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code at the tilt position. By displaying the two-dimensional code at the tilt position, the player can easily read the two-dimensional code.

45A and 45B are the same as FIGS. 43A and 43B and will not be described.
In FIG. 45 (c), the sub image display device 50 descends to the lower end position and stops. In the present embodiment, the lower end position of the sub image display device 50 is a position below the main image display device 5 and not superimposed on the display screen of the main image display device 5. However, the lower end position may be another position that partially hides the display screen of the main image display device 5, for example.
In FIG. 45 (d), the sub image display device 50 tilts backward to the tilt position. The sub image display device 50 displays the two-dimensional code at the tilt position. By displaying the two-dimensional code at the tilt position, the player can easily read the two-dimensional code.
Above, description of the raising / lowering and tilting operations of the sub-image display device using FIGS. 43 to 45 is finished.

In the present embodiment, the case where the two-dimensional code is displayed while the sub image display device 50 is held at the tilt position has been described. However, as described with reference to FIG. 42, the two-dimensional code is displayed during the tilt operation. You may make it do.
In the present embodiment, the case where the tilt operation is performed only once has been described, but the tilt operation may be repeated a plurality of times.
Moreover, although the case where the tilt angle is fixed has been described in the present embodiment, the tilt angle may be varied depending on the effect mode. Further, when the height of the display screen of the sub-image display device 50 is close to the height of the player's eyes, the tilt may not be performed. Further, the tilt angle may be changed by a player setting. Further, the tilt angle may be changed depending on the height of the player's face or eyes recognized by a camera or the like (not shown).
Further, in accordance with the tilt operation of the sub image display device 50, for example, an effect using the main image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9 may be performed.

Further, the operation of the sub-image display device 50 shown in FIGS. 42 to 45 only needs to execute any one operation of FIGS. 42 to 45. In addition, one or a plurality of operations may be selected and executed depending on the production mode. For example, when the two-dimensional code shown in FIG. 36 is displayed twice, the first two-dimensional code is displayed by the operation of the sub-image display device 50 shown in FIG. 42, and the second two-dimensional code is displayed. May be executed by the operation of the sub-image display device 50 shown in FIG.
In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the case where the tilt operation is performed after the sub image display device 50 is lowered to the lower end position has been described. For example, before the sub image display device 50 is lowered (original position). Alternatively, the tilting operation may be performed during the descent.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the arrangement position of the sub image display device 50 is adjacent to the upper side of the main image display device 5 is illustrated, but the arrangement position of the sub image display device 50 is not limited to this. For example, the sub image display device 50 may be disposed below the main image display device 5, on the right side of the main image display device 5, or on the left side of the main image display device 5. Further, the sub image display device 50 may be arranged so as not to be adjacent to the main image display device 5.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the sub image display device 50 is arranged on the gaming board 2 is exemplified, but it may be arranged on the gaming machine frame 3, for example.
Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the shape of the sub image display device 50 and the shape of the display screen are rectangular is illustrated, but the shape of the sub image display device 50 or the shape of the display screen is a shape other than the rectangle. May be.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, various effect operation | movement including the apparatus structure of pachinko machine 1, a data structure, the process shown with the flowchart, and the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the main image display apparatus 5 was carried out. These can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The gaming machine of the embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute variable display, and includes a first display device that can execute a specific effect during execution of variable display, and a two-dimensional code that can be read during execution of variable display. Although the case where the 2nd display apparatus which can be displayed was provided was illustrated, this is an example.

For example, in the present embodiment, the case where one two-dimensional code is displayed on the second display device is illustrated, but a plurality of two-dimensional codes may be displayed on the second display device so as to be readable.
For example, the two-dimensional code to be displayed may be sequentially switched and displayed on the second display device so that the player can read one two-dimensional code from the two-dimensional codes displayed in order. At this time, the display of the two-dimensional code may be switched by operating the stick controller 31A, for example.
Alternatively, a plurality of two-dimensional codes may be displayed on the second display device at a time so that the player can read one two-dimensional code from among the displayed two-dimensional codes.

  Moreover, although the case where the two-dimensional code is displayed on the second display device is illustrated in the present embodiment, for example, a gaming machine may include a plurality of second display devices. The gaming machine may display the two-dimensional code on one display device selected from the plurality of second display devices.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the embodiment is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and can be read during the advantageous state, a first display device that can execute a specific effect during the advantageous state Although the case where the 2nd display apparatus which can display a simple two-dimensional code was provided was illustrated, this is an example.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the case where a two-dimensional code is displayed in an advantageous state has been described, but the two-dimensional code may be displayed even after the advantageous state has ended. For example, when an advantageous state such as a highly accurate state or a high base state ends and an effect of returning to the normal state is performed, the two-dimensional code may be displayed after the effect of returning to the normal state is executed. .

  Moreover, although the said 2nd display apparatus was provided so that operation | movement was possible and it did not display a two-dimensional code during operation | movement, this was an example.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as the operation of the second display device, the lifting operation described with reference to FIG. 33 and the like and the tilt operation described with reference to FIG. 42 and the like are illustrated, but the operation of the second display device is not limited to this. For example, the second display device may perform operations such as horizontal movement, diagonal movement, and rotation. Further, for example, the sub image display device 50 may be arranged in a production model having a drive unit, and the operation of the production model may be set as the operation of the sub image display device 50.

  Moreover, although the said one display machine displayed the two-dimensional code | cord | chord which can alert | report the information regarding a game in any one said game machine, this is an example.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the case where the information related to the game is notified by displaying the information related to the game on the display screen of the mobile terminal that has read the two-dimensional code is exemplified, but the method of notifying the information related to the game is limited to this. Not. For example, information about a game may be displayed on a device other than the mobile terminal. For example, a mobile terminal that has read a two-dimensional code transmits information included in the two-dimensional code to a server using communication means of the mobile terminal, and includes information related to a game based on information received by the server that has received the information. A page or the like may be created, and the created web page may be viewed from another device so that information related to the game is notified.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the second display device exemplifies a case where a two-dimensional code capable of notifying information about a game during execution of the variable display is displayed at any timing. It is an example.

For example, in the present embodiment, a case where display of information related to a game is terminated during execution of the variable display is exemplified, but a method of notifying information related to a game during execution of the variable display is not limited to this. For example, when information related to a game is displayed after the execution of the variable display is completed, it may be displayed together that the information related to the game is not information related to the variable display.
Further, the player may set the display method of the portable terminal so that the display of information regarding the game can be made possible not only during the execution of the variable display. For example, when the display timing of information related to a game varies depending on the display performance of the mobile terminal, the player may be able to change the display timing of information related to the game in accordance with the display performance of the mobile terminal.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the second display device can display a two-dimensional code capable of notifying information relating to the game, and the notification of the information relating to the game by reading the two-dimensional code is more than the progress of the game. Although the case where the two-dimensional code is displayed so as not to be executed first is illustrated, this is an example.

For example, in this embodiment, the case where the display of information related to the game on the mobile terminal is notified after the effect related to the information on the gaming machine is started to be executed is described. It is not limited. For example, the timing displayed on the mobile terminal may be different for each piece of information related to the game, depending on the setting of the player. For example, the reach and notice information may be notified prior to the progress of the game on the gaming machine, and the information on whether the game is a big hit or lost may be notified after the progress of the game on the gaming machine.
Further, the player may be able to select the type of information related to the gaming machine to be notified on the portable terminal. In the portable terminal, it is possible to prevent the notification of information related to the game selected by the player from being executed prior to the progress of the game.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the information regarding the game alert | reported in a portable terminal was previously memorize | stored in the portable terminal and the information regarding the game memorize | stored based on the two-dimensional code was illustrated, it was related with the game to alert | report. The information is not limited to the case where the information is stored in advance in the mobile terminal. For example, based on the two-dimensional code, the mobile terminal may access a predetermined server and acquire information related to the game from the server. Information other than information related to the game may be stored in the server, and information related to the game and other information may be reported on the mobile terminal.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a game score for use in a game is given by using a frequency that is a game value having a size specified by record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using the given game score or a game score given by winning a game.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to a plurality of types according to the operation of the operation lever by the player when a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player and the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible to do.

  That is, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute variable display (for example, a slot machine that rotates a plurality of types of symbols as described above to play a game) and is performing variable display ( For example, a first display device capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a specific effect executed in a slot machine performing a game as described above) during rotation of a plurality of types of symbols in a slot machine performing the game as described above. (For example, a display device that rotates a plurality of types of symbols included in a slot machine that performs a game as described above) and a second display device that can display a two-dimensional code that can be read during execution of variable display (for example, the above-described display device). A display device capable of displaying a two-dimensional code included in a slot machine that performs such a game. Moreover, the modification etc. which demonstrated the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment are applicable also to the slot machine etc. which perform the above games.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after a stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0% is included in the relationship (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the main image display device 5, etc. Changes and modifications can be arbitrarily made without departing from the scope.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from record information of a game recording medium such as a card or a membership card, and a given game score, or The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game and driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the jackpot game is ended based on the determination that the probable change jackpot has been determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols each identifiable and derives and displays a definite special symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the decorative pattern that fluctuates may be different from the fixed decorative pattern that is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the fixed decorative symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of decorative symbols that change.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed has been shown. Not limited to. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, the update of the numerical data indicating the random number value may be performed so that the random numbers are not synchronized by changing the update timing or changing the update range of each random number.

In the above embodiment, the main board 11 stores a random value determination table (display result determination table, jackpot type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main board 11 at the time of starting winning. Based on the random number values (MR1 to MR3), the main board 11 refers to the random value determination table, and determines the random value determination process (determining whether or not to win, determining the variation category, and hitting the jackpot. In this case, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. The execution mode of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to this.
For example, the effect control board 12 stores the random value determination table, and the effect control board 12 receives the random number itself extracted from the main board 11 from the main board 11, and based on the received random value. The random value determination process may be executed with reference to the random value determination table, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the random number determination process may be performed on the effect control board 12.
Further, the random number determination process may be performed on both the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of the random number values and execute the random number determination process, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the presentation control board 12 receives the random number values (MR1 and MR2), determines whether or not to win the jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, determines the type of jackpot and also determines the random value. You may make it receive the determination result of the fluctuation | variation category determined with the main board | substrate 11 based on (MR3). That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main board 11.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame 4A, 4B for game machines Special symbol display device 5 Main image display device 50 Sub image display device 5HL First start prize memory display area 5HR Second start prize memory display area 5H Start prize memory display Area 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8 Speaker 9 Lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A No. 1 start port switch 22B second start port switch 23 count switch 31A stick controller 31B push button 100 game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit

Claims (3)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
A first display device capable of executing a specific effect during execution of variable display;
A game machine comprising: a second display device capable of displaying a two-dimensional code that can be read during execution of variable display. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A first display device capable of executing a specific effect during the advantageous state;
A game machine comprising: a second display device capable of displaying a two-dimensional code readable during the advantageous state.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second display device is operably provided and does not display a two-dimensional code during the operation.

Images